PrismHR Help · Public documentation for Microsoft 365 Copilot

PrismHR Help — Client Administration

Client / Employer Administration

This file is a combined export of PrismHR help topics in Client / Employer Administration. Source help system: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Default.htm Each topic is separated by a heading and includes its original URL.

========================================================================

Cloning a Client

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/2020/Clone_Client.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/2020/Clone_Client.htm

Cloning a Client

You can quickly create a new client using attributes from an existing client. To copy information from an existing client, access the Clone Client form on the Client|Action menu. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

When you open this form while accessing an existing client, the system enables that client’s attributes in the What to Clone panel.

To clone a client, do the following:

  1. Go to the Clone Client form and complete the following fields in the New Client Details panel:

Field — Description

New Client ID — Use the system-generated client ID that displays or enter the ID for the new client. If you enter an existing client ID in this field and press Tab a message displays, “Client ID already exists.” Click OK to clear the message and then re-enter another ID. Note: The system uses “conditional incrementing” on the New Client ID when you use the system-generated ID, which takes affect once you click Clone and the process succeeds.

New Client Name — Enter the name of the client you are creating.

Client Status — Select the current status of the client.

Status Date — Enter or select the date when you want to enable this client.

  1. Deselect or select the attributes for this client in the What to Clone panel.

Note: Note the following:

  1. Click Clone. The Client Details form displays, where you can continue providing information about this client.

  2. Click Save.

========================================================================

Approval Policy Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Approval_Policy_Setup.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Approval_Policy_Setup.htm

Approval Policy Setup

There are many places in PrismHR where actions require approvals before they are finalized.

You need to set up approval policies as follows:

========================================================================

Using the Approval Process

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Approval_Processing.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Approval_Processing.htm

Using the Approval Process

When events take place that could potentially require an approval, such as a new hire or a payroll, PrismHR determines if there is a policy in place for the particular approval type.

========================================================================

Reviewing Form I-9 Approvals

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Form-I-9-Section-2.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Form-I-9-Section-2.htm

Reviewing Form I-9 Approvals

Once an employee has submitted Form I-9 Section 1, users who have been set up as an I-9 Approver can complete Section 2. For more information about the employee process for completing Section 1, see See Employee Process for Completing Form I-9 Section 1.

To complete Section 2 of Form I-9:

  1. Click the Client menu.
  2. From Client|Action, click Approvals Pending. The Approvals Pending form displays.
  3. In the Approvals Pending (Assigned to You) panel, click I-9 Section 2 for an employee. The I9 Section 2 form displays. > Note: Note: If multiple users have been set up as an I-9 Approver, pending approvals display in the Approvals Pending (Available to You) panel instead. Click I-9 Section 2 for an employee in this panel to display the Approval form, then click Grab to move the approval into the Approvals Pending (Assigned to You) panel. Once the approval displays in the Approvals Pending (Assigned to You) panel, click I-9 Section 2 for an employee in this panel to display the Review I-9 Section 1 step of the I9 Section 2 form. [Image: screenshot]
  4. Review the employee’s entries on Form I-9 Section 1. If changes are necessary, click Deny to return Section 1 to the employee for corrections. Otherwise, click Next. The Employment Eligibility Verification step displays, where supporting document information can be entered. Alternatively, if the employee uploaded supporting documents while completing Section 1, the documents display and can be reviewed. [Image: screenshot]
  5. Enter document information in the corresponding fields as necessary. When information for all supporting documents has been entered, click Next. The Additional Information step displays. [Image: screenshot]
  6. Enter any additional information about the form as necessary, then click Next. If remote verification is enabled for the user’s worksite location, the Remote Verification & Certification step displays. If remote verification is not enabled, the Certification step displays. The fields that display in these two steps are identical; however, the Remote Verification & Certification step includes additional options for indicating whether the user examined the employee’s supporting documents physically or remotely using an alternative procedure authorized by the Department of Homeland Security (DHS). For more information about remote verification,See Maintaining Worksite LocationsSee Maintaining Worksite Locations . For more information about the alternative procedure, as well as eligibility requirements, refer to the USCIS website. [Image: screenshot]
  7. Indicate whether the employee’s documents were examined remotely or physically, if applicable, and then enter employer or authorized representative information in the remaining fields. Once all entries have been made, click Next. The Review I-9 step displays again, where the complete Form I-9 can be reviewed. [Image: screenshot]
  8. After reviewing the completed Form I-9, click Submit. A message window displays to confirm the form should be submitted. Click Yes to submit the form. The form is then submitted, and options for downloading or printing the form display. [Image: screenshot]
  9. Click Download to download the completed Form I-9, or click Print to print the form.
  10. After downloading or printing the form as necessary, click Done. The I9 Section 2 form closes.

========================================================================

Working with Pending Approvals

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Pending.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Pending.htm

Working with Pending Approvals

The Approvals Pending form lists any pending approvals that are assigned or available to you.

Note: Click the Refresh button to remain on the same form or report while refreshing the window to display new entries.

Note: Note the following when working with pending approvals:

Approvals Pending (Assigned to You)

You can act on approvals listed in the Approvals Pending (Available to You) panel.

Approvals Pending (Available to You)

To act on an approval that is available to you, “grab” the approval. The system assigns the approval to you.

  1. Within the Approvals Pending (Available to You) panel, click the desired Approval Type. The Approval form opens.

You can click Show Audit History to display the history of users involved in processing the action.

  1. Click Grab. The selected approval type now appears in the Approvals Pending (Assigned to You) panel.

There are two methods available to process an approval:

  1. Within the Approvals Pending (Available to You) panel, click the desired Approval Type. The Approval form opens.

You can click Show Audit History to display the history of users involved in processing the action.

  1. Click Grab. The selected approval type now appears in the Approvals Pending (Assigned to You) panel.

Note: Note: You can open the pending approval in Approvals Pending (Assigned to You) panel and click Return to Queue. The approval pending item is then returned to the Available to You queue for you or another user to access later.

Related Topics

Using the Approval Process

Setting Approval Policies

Setting Global Approval Policies

========================================================================

Reviewing Processed Approvals

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Processed.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Processed.htm

Reviewing Processed Approvals

Use the Approvals Processed form to review all approvals processed for the client during a specific date range.

[Image: screenshot]

To review processed approvals:

  1. Go to the Approvals Processed form on the Client|Action menu.

  2. Enter the Start Date and End Date that occurs within one year (for example, 01/01/2022 to 12/31/2022).

Note: Starting with the year 2023, you can enter a date range to display processed approvals more than one year in the past. However, if you enter a range of more than one year (for example, 01/01/2023 to 01/01/2024), the “Date range entered must be within one year” message displays.

  1. Click Submit.

The system displays all approvals that occurred during that date range.

  1. To view the details of an approval, click the Approval Type. The Approval form displays, including the history of the people who created the item that required approval action and the person or people who approved it.

[Image: screenshot]

Related Topics

Using the Approval Process

========================================================================

Reviewing Standard Approvals

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Standard.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Approvals_Standard.htm

Reviewing Standard Approvals

For standard approvals, click the Approval Type to review the information. The Approval form opens.

Note: Note the following when working with approvals:

For example, the following information displays when you select a Rehire approval:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: You can scroll up or down to view all the information.

Note: Note the following about rehire approvals:

To review standard approvals, do the following:

  1. Review the information on the Approval form.
  1. After reviewing the information, click one of the following:

Note: Note: Return to Queue displays only for approval steps that are “grabbed” from AM or HR roles.

========================================================================

Working with Bill Pending Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Bill_Pending.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Bill_Pending.htm

Working with Bill Pending Data

The Bill Pending Events panel, on the Bill Pending form, lists billing events that will occur during the next scheduled billing date (in other words, they are pending). These billing events can be created on this form or generated automatically by PrismHR.

Background

There are three ways to create invoice line items:

[Image: Bill Pending Events example]

See Working with Billing Items

System Billing Events

Several events trigger PrismHR to generate a pending bill for clients. Here are two examples:

Manual Billing Events

Many reasons and situations exist in which you need to manually create a line item. In each case, PrismHR bills the client upon the next invoice, not an immediate invoice.

Importing Bill Pending Data

You can access the Bill Pending import template in the Data Import Tool from this form to import bill pending data by clicking Import

[Image: import icon]

.

The Bill Pending import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Bill Pending form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: hammer and wrench icon]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Bill Pending import template option.

Note: Note the following when importing Bill Pending data:

Understanding the E-Verify Bill Pending Fee

The system applies an E-Verify fee in the Bill Pending form for each new hire when the Submit for E-Verification field is enabled on the New Hire form. After saving the new hire, the system automatically creates a bill pending fee using the EV-FEES bill code. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Working with Billing Items

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Bill_Pending_Line_Item_Details.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Bill_Pending_Line_Item_Details.htm

Working with Billing Items

Use the Bill Pending Details form to enter a billing item or view the details of an existing one. For example:

[Image: Line Item Details form, for entering a new bill pending record]

Note: If you are creating a new line item, enter the necessary information. If you are viewing a line item entry, you cannot make changes.

In addition, you can place a bill-pending item on hold (taking it out of “in-progress” status and returning it to “time-entry” status) by editing its Bill Date, Event, and Bill Rate in the Bill Pending Details form.

Important! This process is not available for restartable payrolls.

To enter a billing item:

  1. Go to the Bill Pending form on the Client|Action menu.

  2. Click New Entry. The Bill Pending Details form displays.

  3. Enter the following information for the line item:

Field — Description

Bill Date — Enter or select the Bill Date on which billing will occur.

Event — Enter or select the billing Event code.

Billing Units — Enter the Billing Units.

Bill Rate — Enter the Bill Rate for each billing unit.

Bill Amount — The Bill Amount field is equal to Billing Units x Bill Rate. If you change the Bill Amount, the system recalculates the Bill Rate to make the numbers work.

Employee — Enter or select the ID of the Employee. The employee’s name displays, as well as any Location, Division, Department, Shift, or Project assignments.

Pay Group — Enter or select the Pay Group code. If you specify a pay group, you must enter a Location so the system can calculate any taxes. Note: You can enter an employee or a pay group (or neither), but you cannot have both in the same line item entry.

Payroll Type — Select the payroll batch type. For example, you can select the Regularly Scheduled payroll type if you only want to bill on a regularly scheduled payroll. (Note: The Select option (default) assumes all payroll types.)

Location — Enter or select the Location code.

Division — Enter or select the Division code. Note: If you have multiple locations with separate bank accounts for each of them, you can debit an invoice for a specific location/division’s bank account by setting it to ACH by Location or ACH by Division and selecting the Non-ACH option on the Client|Change|Worksite Locations form, which would eliminate internal bank transfers when submitting a pending client bill.

Department — Enter or select the Department code.

Shift — Enter or select the Shift.

Project — Enter or select the Project code.

Comment — Enter a Comment for this line item, if appropriate. Note: Comments are restricted to a maximum of 40 characters.

Cost Amount — You can enter the Cost Amount as a positive number to charge against this line item, or you can enter a negative amount to lower the total cost.

Repeat Thru Date — Enter or select a Repeat Thru Date that indicates when the recurring event starts and stops. See Using Repeat Thru Date Correctly for more information.

Repeat Cycle — If you entered a Repeat Thru Date, select a Repeat Cycle for the billing frequency. See Using Repeat Cycle Correctly for more information.

Bill Status — If this is an existing line item, the system displays the Bill Status for this line item.

  1. The Audit Information panel lists the user who entered the line item, the date and time they did so, and the invoice number and date for the billing. (Any entries you make in these fields while creating a bill pending line item will not be saved. The system saves the audit information.)

  2. When you are sure of your entries, click Save.

Note: Note: You can delete a bill pending entry that is included in a payroll batch before the batch is finalized; the payroll processor will be required to recalculate the payroll. Please note that you cannot delete a bill pending item that is included in a payroll batch that is awaiting the client’s approval.

To edit a bill-pending item to place it on hold:

  1. Reset the Payroll Calculation: Complete status to Payroll Calculation: Ready on the calculated payroll by finalizing the timesheets again in the Process Payroll form. (This step deletes any initialized vouchers, so the payroll is no longer initialized.)

  2. Select the bill-pending item on the Bill Pending form. The Bill Pending Details form displays.

  3. Update the Bill Date and other pertinent information, which places the bill-pending item on hold.

  4. Click Save. After initializing the payroll again, the edited bill-pending item no longer displays in the initialized invoice.

Note: Note the following:

Avoiding Pitfalls

Client Bill Pending is an extremely useful tool; at the same time, problems can occur if you are not careful. PrismHR does only what you tell it to do, so ensure your entries are correct. Client Bill Pending is both employee-sensitive and date-sensitive.

Employee Sensitivity

For example, you set up a new employee named Joe, who is an active employee and is paid once a month on the first. You create a line item for Joe on the second day of the month.

PrismHR does not convert the line item into a bill for the client until Joe’s next pay day, which is the first of the following month.

If this feature was not employee-sensitive, you would bill the client on the next invoice, which could fall before the first of the month.

Date Sensitivity

For example, you create a line item for January 1, 2024, but specify a billing date of January 1, 2026 by mistake. The line item remains dormant in PrismHR until the date you specified, then is included in the next invoice after that date.

Using Repeat Thru Date Correctly

If you set up a recurring event, you must define the date limits of the event. The system uses the Repeat Thru Date field to know when the recurring event starts and when it stops.

Be very aware of the dates you want to define and double-check your date entries. The system automatically calculates if any dates have been “missed” upon the first payroll run after you define the recurring event.

For example, you have a weekly billing event for a payroll that you want to occur starting on or after January 1, 2024. You enter 12/31/24 in the Repeat Thru Date field. However, you mistakenly enter the start date (in the Bill Date field) as 1/1/23 instead of 1/1/24. Upon January 2, 2024 (the first business day of the year), PrismHR realizes it has not performed its weekly billing (based on the check date) since the starting date. Therefore, PrismHR creates 52 transactions in order to “catch up” to the present date.

Using Repeat Cycle Correctly

If you set up a recurring event, you must define how often to repeat the event. The system uses the Repeat Cycle field to know how often it must run the recurring event.

For example, you have a monthly billing event for an end-of-the-month payroll. The system reads what you enter literally: in other words, it is very exact. You mistakenly enter the billing date (in the Bill Date field) as 1/31/24 instead of 1/28/24. Upon February 29, 2024 (because of the leap year – otherwise February 28), PrismHR realizes it is not the 31st day of the month. Therefore, PrismHR skips the transaction.

Cost

If you enter an amount in the cost section of Bill Pending, the cost is updated when a payroll is posted.

For example, you need to set up a client bill pending for an overbilling on SUTA. The rate you charge your client is 2.7% and you mistakenly charged them 3.00% on $15,000 taxable wages. SUTA is not a profit center for this client so the billing should match the cost. The liability was calculated at the correct rate of 2.7%. When entering the client’s credit for $45.00, leave the cost column blank. There is no need to adjust cost.

As another example, you bill your client for drug testing the employees. The arrangement you make with the client is they pay $28.00 per drug test. Your provider bills you $20.00 per employee. Enter the client bill pending as $20.00 in the cost field so that the system can calculate the income.

Parent Topic

Working with Bill Pending Data

========================================================================

Changing the Client Status

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Client_Status_Change.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Client_Status_Change.htm

Changing the Client Status

Define a client status in the Client Statuses form.

Display a company’s current status or change a company’s status with the Client Status Change form.

To change the client status:

  1. Click Client.

  2. From Client|Action, select Client Status Change.

  3. Change status as described in the table, then click Save when all changes are completed.

To do this Perform this action
Set the client status to Active, Inactive, or Pending 1. Select New Status for this client. 2. Enter the Effective Date. 3. Click Save. Note: Setting the status to Inactive displays the Client Inactivation Reason field (required), where you can enter or select a corresponding reason code associated with the client’s inactive status. (If you select Client Inactivation Reason, only reasons matching Inactive display in the Search Inactive Reason list.)
  1. Select New Status for this client.
  2. Enter the Effective Date.
  3. Click Save. | Set the client status to Client Cancelling (pre-termination) | 1. Select Client Cancelling from the New Status drop-down. This indicates that this client will terminate at a future date. 2. Enter the Effective Date for changing to pre-termination status. 3. Enter the Planned Termination Date. 4. Click Save. |
  4. Select Client Cancelling from the New Status drop-down. This indicates that this client will terminate at a future date.
  5. Enter the Effective Date for changing to pre-termination status.
  6. Enter the Planned Termination Date.
  7. Click Save. | Set the client status to Terminated | Before terminating a client: - Ensure the correct client is selected. - Ensure that no payrolls need completing. Important! Terminations cannot be reversed. To terminate a client: 1. Select Terminated from the New Status drop-down. The system displays a warning about what occurs when a client is terminated and asks if you still want to proceed. 2. Click Yes. 3. Enter the Effective Date for the termination. 4. Click Client Termination Reason and select a reason in the Select Term Reason list. Note: Only applicable reasons display in the Select Term Reason list when you select the Client Termination Reason field (required). (The New Status field must be set to Terminated to display this field.) 5. From the Do you want to terminate active employees for this company drop-down, select the appropriate option: - No: The employees’ statuses do not change. A user must manually change those employees’ statuses using the appropriate form, as required. - Yes: When you choose Yes, the system displays the employee termination fields. Set the changes you want to apply to all active employees.  | a.  | Employee Termination Status: Defined on the Employee Statuses form.  |  | —  | —  |  | b.  | Employee Termination Date: Date employee will be terminated.  |  | —  | —  |  | c.  | Employee Termination Reason: Defined on the Reasons form.  |  | —  | —  | d. — Enroll employees with COBRA-electable benefits in COBRA: If enabled, the system will create COBRA participant records for those employees. 6. Enter information in the Termination Details section that describes important details about the client termination, such as whether their taxes are complete for the year, are their W2s complete, or is the client moving to another PEO. 7. Verify that all information is correct and click Save. > Note: Note: If there are users who need temporary access to the client information, an administrator needs to adjust their Data Security. |
  1. Select Terminated from the New Status drop-down. The system displays a warning about what occurs when a client is terminated and asks if you still want to proceed.
  2. Click Yes.
  3. Enter the Effective Date for the termination.
  4. Click Client Termination Reason and select a reason in the Select Term Reason list.
  5. From the Do you want to terminate active employees for this company drop-down, select the appropriate option:
  1. Enter information in the Termination Details section that describes important details about the client termination, such as whether their taxes are complete for the year, are their W2s complete, or is the client moving to another PEO.
  2. Verify that all information is correct and click Save. Related Topics

Maintaining Information With System Code Files and Utilities

Creating or deleting a Client Status

Establishing Reason Codes for Client Terminations

Maintaining Employee Statuses

Creating Reason Codes for employee status change

Client Status History

========================================================================

Copying Client Settings

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Copy_Client_Settings.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Copy_Client_Settings.htm

Copying Client Settings

You can copy client settings using attributes on the Copy Client Settings form from an existing client to another client. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To copy client settings, do the following:

  1. Go to the Copy Client Settings form on the Operations|Utility Processing menu and complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Copy From Client — Enter or select the client ID or client name whose settings you want to copy.

Copy to Client — Enter or select the Client ID where you want the settings copied. The Client Name displays.

  1. Deselect or select the attributes for this client in the What to Copy panel.

Note: Note the following:

  1. Click Copy. The Existing Data panel displays existing client settings.

  2. Click Update Existing. A warning message displays, “This process will override any existing records in the client. Are you sure you want to continue?” Click Yes to continue.

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Deleting a Pending Client

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Delete-Pending-Client.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Delete-Pending-Client.htm

Deleting a Pending Client

Use this form to remove a client entered into the system that never actually ran payroll and is no longer expected to be a client.

Prerequisites

The following prerequisites must be met before you can perform this action:

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To delete a pending client:

  1. Click Client.

  2. From Client|Action, click Delete Pending Client.

  3. Click the Client link to select a client. The status must be Pending.

  4. Click Delete Client to complete this process.

========================================================================

Miscellaneous Charges

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Action/Miscellaneous_Charges.htm Path: PD/Company/Action/Miscellaneous_Charges.htm

Miscellaneous Charges

Use the Miscellaneous Charges form to enter information into the Adjustments column of the Profitability Report.

WARNING: Once you save a Miscellaneous Charge, you cannot edit or delete it. Be sure the information is correct before saving.

[Image: Miscellaneous charges form]

To submit this form, do the following:

  1. Enter the invoice Bill Date.

  2. Enter the Bill Code. The bill code Description displays.

  3. Enter a Comment for this charge.

  4. Enter a Cost amount, if appropriate.

  5. Review the information for accuracy.

  6. Click Save.

========================================================================

Available Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Analytics-Data%20Retriever/Data_Retriever_List%20of%20Data%20Fields.htm Path: PD/Company/Analytics-Data Retriever/Data_Retriever_List of Data Fields.htm

Available Data

The following data is available:

Step 1 - Select Client

The names of your clients display in the Step 1 Select Client panel.

Step 2 - Add Field

The following data fields are available in the Step 2 - Add Fields panel:

Name and Contact

Personal Detail

Status Detail

License Details

Emergency Contact

Employment

Testing

Resident Address

Phone and Email

Mailing Address

Form W-2 Address

Work Status

Work Assignments

Work Miscellaneous

Compensation

Allocations

Federal Tax Filing

State Tax Filing

Local Tax Filing

Employee Verification

Performance

Deposit

Other Details

Alternate Rates

Benefits

Status History

Step 3 - Add Totals

The following data fields are available in the Step 3 - Add Totals column.

Note: Note: By default, the company tax and workers’ compensation data is available only to the service provider or worksite manager and worksite trusted advisor users associated with clients that are assigned to an unbundled billing template and billing format. These menus are restricted from view for worksite manager and worksite trusted advisor users associated with clients that are assigned to bundled billing templates and formats.

========================================================================

Working with Data Retriever

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Analytics-Data%20Retriever/Data_Retriever_Q3.htm Path: PD/Company/Analytics-Data Retriever/Data_Retriever_Q3.htm

Working with Data Retriever

The Data Retriever form is a quick and flexible way to retrieve, export, and manipulate data from your system. You can quickly pull raw data from multiple clients and the entities within these clients. Data Retriever can give you access to aggregate system data for purposes of analysis or analytics.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: By default, the company tax and workers’ compensation data is available only to the service providers. Unless you enable client access to this data these items are restricted from view for worksite manager and worksite trusted advisor users.

Use the + to expand the categories in any column.

To create a Data Retriever report:

  1. In the Step 1 column, select the clients you want to query. You can select as many clients as you want.

  2. In the Step 2 column, select the fields you want to query. If you query Employment Status, you can click [Image: screenshot] to select statuses on which to filter.

  3. In the Step 3 column, select the totals you want, then select a date range from the calendar.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. To add another date range or to select additional data, click the date range link.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Optionally, you can expand certain items and select a sort order for them.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Save.

  2. Click Run. When your report is ready, the results display.

Note: Note: Data retriever is configured to calculate up to four reports at one time. If a user attempts to generate a report while the four reports are calculating, the report will be placed in a queue. If you would like to view the status of any report that has been run or is currently in the queue, you can navigate to Data Retriever>Actions menu>View Run Report (Last 24 hours).

  1. To export the report to a spreadsheet format, click Export. The system exports your data to a .csv file.

From the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

, you can select:

Note: Note: You can save report templates for yourself only or share them and provide access to specific user types.

For more information on the fields in Data Retriever, See Available Data

========================================================================

Save Report Template by User Type

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Analytics-Data%20Retriever/Data_Retriever_Save_Report_Template_by_Use_Type.htm Path: PD/Company/Analytics-Data Retriever/Data_Retriever_Save_Report_Template_by_Use_Type.htm

Save Report Template by User Type

When you save a report template in Data Retriever, you can specify which type of user can have access to it.

  1. From the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] in Data Retriever, select Save Report Template.

  2. Enable the option to save the report for yourself only or select a user type to associate with the report:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Save.

To edit an existing report template, load the template, make changes, and save it. Be sure to select Replace the existing report?.

To create a new report template from an existing one, load the template, make changes, and save it. Be sure to change the Description of Report and clear the option to Replace the existing report?.

========================================================================

Data Retriever Security

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Analytics-Data%20Retriever/Data_Retriever_Security.htm Path: PD/Company/Analytics-Data Retriever/Data_Retriever_Security.htm

Data Retriever Security

By default, access to potentially sensitive data is restricted in Data Retriever. For example, company tax and workers’ compensation data is available only to service providers. Unless you enable client access to this data for worksite manager or worksite trusted advisor users, it does not display.

Your organization should have a well-planned strategy for applying role-based security. Based on the role associated with a user account, you can define the forms and fields in PrismHR that users can view or edit. You can also define the fields that users can query.

Step 2 Data

You can set the security for Step 2 of the Data Retriever query process on the User Roles form. Step 2 data is pulled from the following forms:

Toggle the Access option to control access to the data.

[Image: screenshot]

For field-level security, click the Field link. The Field Security Maintenance form displays. Toggle the Enable/Disable/Hidden options for each field.

[Image: screenshot]

Step 3 Security

For the calculated data that displays in Step 3, you also set security on the User Roles form. Full, Inquiry, or Deny access is set on AGG.DATA*GETIT.

To set field-level security for Step 3 data, click the Field link.

[Image: screenshot]

The Field Security form displays. Use the toggle switch to enable or restrict access to each field.

[Image: screenshot]

You can also enable or restrict access to the expanded data items that display after you set the date rage.

[Image: screenshot]

For example, Invoiced items include Billing Format, Invoiced As and Detail Code. You must set security for each of these items.

The Invoiced items in Step 3 include only amounts from billing vouchers that are associated with an employee ID. Miscellaneous charges (for example, delivery fees) are not included on the reports. If miscellaneous or bundled charges are included, client reports will not balance back to the invoice.

Note: Note: Note that if a client changes billing format mid-year, Data Retriever shows the billing breakout formats. Once the data cube is rebuilt, the data will only break out based upon the current billing format.

========================================================================

Update for Imported Checks

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Analytics-Data%20Retriever/Update_for_Imported_Checks.htm Path: PD/Company/Analytics-Data Retriever/Update_for_Imported_Checks.htm

Update for Imported Checks

If you used the backend system to import employee payroll vouchers, you must use the Data Retriever Update for Imported Checks utility to ensure that your data is accessible in Data Retriever. This feature allows your data to flow to the appropriate employee payroll vouchers and registers, exactly as if payroll was processed in PrismHR.

After you import employee payroll vouchers:

  1. From the Back Office menu, under System|Action, select Data Retriever for Imported Checks.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter the Client ID and Year.

  2. Click Run.

  3. The system displays a confirmation message. Click OK.

Vouchers that have been imported through the backend system are now included in Step 3 data. Although the data remains in system, the temporary data files are purged when the import batch is posted.

========================================================================

Linking PTO Accrual Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Accruing_PTO_Hours_for_Future_Use.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Accruing_PTO_Hours_for_Future_Use.htm

Linking PTO Accrual Plans

.

You can use the Linked Accrual Plans feature to accrue employee PTO hours for transfer once the plan year ends. This feature consists of two PTO plans that you must set up so employees can accrue time for a plan year in one register that they cannot use until the plan year ends. After the plan year ends, the accrued hours move to a new register where employees can use their PTO hours. (Employees can have several different linked accrual plans, one for sick time, one for vacation time, and so on.)

Note: Note the following:

Using Linked Accrual Plans Feature

To use the Linked Accrual Plans feature, you must set up two PTO plans in the PTO Benefit Plans form:

The following diagram demonstrates the setup for Linked Accrual Plans:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

Setting Up the Linked Accrual Plans Feature

Set up the following:

  1. PTO Class: Use the PTO Classes form to define which PTO classes will be used in conjunction with each other, consisting of a PTO class for the accrual and a PTO class for the balance. (See the Client Administration Guide for details on defining PTO classes.)

For example:

a. Create a PTO Class Code for the Balance plan. For example, VACBAL.

Note: Do not enable Linked Accrual.

b. Create a PTO Class Code for the Accrual plan. For example, VACACCR.
c. Enable Linked Accrual.
— —
d. In the Transfer To field, select VACBAL.
— —

Note: These PTO classes are now linked and cannot be linked to other classes.

  1. PTO Register: Enable the Prior Year Accrual trigger method on the PTO Register Types form to trigger the balance register to move the accrued PTO hours from the accrual plan to the balance plan. (See the Client Administration Guide for details on working with PTO registers.)

For example:

a. Create a PTO Type Code register for the Balance plan. For example, VACBAL.
b. Create a PTO Type Code register for the Accrual plan. For example, VACACCR.
  1. PTO Benefit Plan: Enroll employees in an Accrual plan and a Balance plan on the PTO Benefit Plans form. The Accrual plan determines the PTO time accrued. The system does not use the Balance plan to determine the accruals, but employees must be enrolled in both plans for the transfer to work correctly.
  1. — Create a PTO Benefit Plan for the Balance plan. For example, VACBAL. (You must select a calculation basis, but the system does not use it to calculate accruals.)

  2. — Create a PTO Benefit Plan for the Accrual plan. For example, VACACCR. (This will hold the settings for the accruals.)

Understanding the Transfer Process

When the system transfers accrued PTO hours, the employee register displays the accrued amount in the calculated column in the Balance register and displays an annotation, “Accrual Transfer MM/DD/YY,” in the details. The system then zeroes out the year-to-date accrual amounts in the employee Accrual register and displays an annotation, “XX number of hours moved to linked plan.”

========================================================================

Adjusting Summary Time Sheet Columns

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Adjusting_Summary_Time_Sheet_Columns.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Adjusting_Summary_Time_Sheet_Columns.htm

Adjusting Summary Time Sheet Columns

Users specify the Summary Time Sheet Pay Codes in the Client Details Time Sheet tab. This determines the pay columns that display in Summary Time Sheet Entry.

Note: Note: Client Details is found in the Client menu under Client|Change.

You can change or reorder the columns as needed and the system displays messages to alert you to the impact that your edits will have. Use one of the following procedures to change or reorder the columns and get the results you want:

Changing Columns

You can change the column from one pay code to another with the same earning type (such as cash).

  1. In the Time Sheet tab of Client Details, edit one of the Pay Codes to change it to one for the same type of pay (for example, REG1 to REG2).

  2. In the message “This action will replace pay code [REG1] with pay code [REG2] for all current summary time sheet records. These changes will occur when this form is saved. Do you wish to continue?” click the Yes button to reassign the values to the new pay code (for example, REG2).

Note: Note: If you click No, the system does not change the pay code.

  1. Click Save.

Reordering Columns

If you want to rearrange the columns and, ultimately, keep the current hours assigned to the same pay codes they were before you changed the columns, follow these steps.

  1. In the Time Sheet tab of Client Details, edit one of the Pay Codes to change it to one for the same type of pay (for example, REG3 to REG4).

  2. In the message “This action will replace pay code [REG3] with pay code [REG4] for all current summary time sheet records. These changes will occur when this form is saved. Do you wish to continue?” click the Yes button to (temporarily) reassign the values to the new pay code (for example, REG4).

Note: Note: If you click No, the system does not change the pay code.

  1. Enter the original pay code (for example, REG3) in a new column.

  2. In the message, “You previously stated that you would like to replace [REG3] pay code on active time sheets with [REG4]. Do you still wish to do this [Yes], or move the values associated with the [REG3] to this new position [No]?”:

  1. Click Save.

Changing to a Different Type of Pay

If you need to change a pay code from one type of pay to another, you can only do so if there are no values entered in an active payroll. Examples are when you change to a pay code with a different calculation method or pay reason.

  1. Open Payroll Control (found in the Payroll menu under Payroll|Change).

  2. Enter the Payroll Number of the active payroll.

  3. Click Delete.

  4. In the confirmation message, click Yes.

  5. Click Yes in the message to create a replacement payroll for the one you just deleted.

  6. Return to the Client Details Time Sheet tab and change the pay code.

  7. Users can proceed to enter data in the time sheet for the new pay code.

Note: Note: If there are only a few values in the time sheet, you can simply delete them from the time sheet rather than deleting the entire payroll and creating a new one.

Related Topics

Client Details Setting Client Time Sheet Parameters

Making Summary Timesheet Entries

========================================================================

All Benefit Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/All_Benefit_Plans.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/All_Benefit_Plans.htm

All Benefit Plans

Use the All Benefit Plans panel in ASO Global G/L Account Setup to maintain ASO client accounting for benefit plans.

[Image: screenshot]

To set the accounts for all benefit plans:

  1. Enter the expense Debit Account to debit with the amount of any company contribution to all benefit plans. The account name displays.

  2. Enter the Credit Account for the accrued liability (or other) account to credit with the amount of any company contribution for all benefit plans. The account name displays.

  3. Click Save.

If any benefit plans should post to different accounts:

  1. Enter the Except Benefit Plan ID. The Plan Description displays.

  2. Enter the expense Debit Account to debit with the amount of company contributions to this benefit plan. The Account Name displays.

  3. Enter the Credit Account for the accrued liability (or other) account to credit with the amount of company contributions for the benefit plan. The Account Name displays.

  4. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

Maintaining ASO Client Accounting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/All_Cash_Accounts.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/All_Cash_Accounts.htm

Maintaining ASO Client Accounting

Use the All Cash Accounts panel in the ASO Global G/L Account Setup form to maintain ASO client accounting for cash management.

[Image: screenshot]

To maintain ASO client accounting, do the following:

  1. Enter the Cash Offset by Checking account in the Credit Account field. The account name displays.

  2. If a cash account should post to a different account:

a. Enter the Except Cash Account. The Reference displays.
  1. — Enter the appropriate Cash Offset by Checking account in the Credit Account for the cash account. The Account Name displays.
  1. Click Save.

Hiding or Disabling the All Cash Accounts Panel

Service providers can hide or disable the All Cash Accounts panel from their worksite managers and worksite trusted advisors, so those users cannot view and select system bank accounts.

Note: Note the following before hiding or disabling the All Cash Accounts panel:

To hide or disable this panel, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From System|Change, select User Roles.

  3. Enter or select the Role ID.

  4. Filter the Search for Description field to ASO Global G/L Account Setup. The form’s information displays.

  5. Select Field in the Security column. The Field Security Maintenance form displays.

  6. Click Add. The Field Security Selection form displays “All Cash Accounts” (the panel you want to disable or hide) in the Description column.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the checkbox in the Select Field column, then click Accept. The Field Security Maintenance form displays.

  2. Select Enable in the Permissions column to set access to either Disable or Hidden (these options achieve the same result).

  3. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

All Deduction Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/All_Deduction_Codes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/All_Deduction_Codes.htm

All Deduction Codes

Use the All Deduction Codes panel in ASO Global G/L Account Setup to maintain ASO client accounting for deduction codes.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter the Credit Account (liability) for all withholdings. The account name displays.

  2. If any deduction codes should post to a different account:

a. Enter the Except Deduction Code. The Description displays.
b. Enter the Credit Account for the withholding. The Account Name displays.
— —
  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

All Tax Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/All_Tax_Codes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/All_Tax_Codes.htm

All Tax Codes

Use the All Tax Codes panel in ASO Global G/L Account Setup to maintain ASO client accounting for all taxes.

[Image: screenshot]

To maintain ASO client accounting for all taxes:

  1. To set the accounts for all tax codes:
  1. — Enter the Debit Account to debit with the amount of all employee-paid taxes. The account name displays.

  2. — Enter the Credit Account to credit with all employee and employer taxes. The account name displays.

  1. If any tax codes should post to different accounts:
a. Enter the Except Tax Code for the tax deduction. The Tax Description displays.
  1. — Enter the Debit Account to debit with the amount of any employer-paid taxes that use the tax code. The Account Name displays.

  2. — Enter the Credit Account to credit with the amount of any employee/employer taxes calculated to the tax code. The Account Name displays.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

All Workers’ Compensation States

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/All_WC_States.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/All_WC_States.htm

All Workers’ Compensation States

Use the All Workers’ Compensation States panel in ASO Global G/L Account Setup to maintain ASO client accounting for all workers’ compensation claims.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. To set the accounts for all workers’ compensation claims:
  1. — Enter the Debit Account to debit with the amount of all workers’ compensation insurance premiums. The account name displays.

  2. — Enter the Credit Account to credit with the amount of all workers’ compensation insurance premiums. The account name displays.

  1. If workers’ compensations claims should post to different accounts for certain states:
a. Enter each Except Worker Compensation State code. The State Name displays.
  1. Enter the Debit Account to debit with the amount of worker’s compensation insurance premiums in that state. The Account Name displays.

  2. Enter the Credit Account to credit with the amount of worker’s compensation insurance premiums in that state. The Account Name displays.

  3. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

Creating Core Chart of Account Numbers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ASO_Accounting_Codes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ASO_Accounting_Codes.htm

Creating Core Chart of Account Numbers

You can use the ASO Accounting Codes form to create a core chart of account numbers for the client.

Note: Click the Data Import Tool icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) to upload a database file and import data. (This icon displays for all user roles, except “Inquiry Only.”)

Note: Note: For more information about the Data Import Tool form, see the PrismHR Payroll Administration Guide.

To create a core chart of account numbers, do the following:

  1. Enter the Account code.

  2. Enter the Account Name, for example, Payroll Tax Expense or FICA Liability.

  3. Select Prefix/Suffix Allowed if the client uses a prefix or suffix in addition to the core account number.

  4. Click Save.

Repeat this procedure for each account that you need to set up.

Related Topics

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

Building Structure for Chart of Accounts Segments

Regenerating ASO Client Accounting

========================================================================

Building Structure for Chart of Accounts Segments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ASO_GL_Accounts.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ASO_GL_Accounts.htm

Building Structure for Chart of Accounts Segments

Use the ASO G/L Account Setup form to build the structure for chart of accounts segments, if they are different than what is set up in the global parameters. Indicate the overrides, if any, that are necessary to meet the client’s account structure requirements.

To set up the structure for chart of accounts segments:

  1. Enter the core Account code to build.

  2. If required, enter the variable or string Prefix Values for the G/L account number. For example, enter 01 to prefix the G/L account numbers with 01.

  3. If required, enter the variable or string Suffix Values for the G/L account number.

  4. Select the Segment Delimiter to use between the account number and the prefix or suffix values.

Prefix/Suffix Overrides

If the G/L account requires a prefix or suffix override, enter that information in the Prefix/Suffix Overrides panel.

  1. For each override:

In our example, PrismHR replaces the department code ACCT with 700. The account number displays as 700-6000 in the report or download for the client.

Account Overrides

If the G/L account requires an account override, enter that information in the Account Overrides panel.

  1. For each override:

In our example, PrismHR overrides the account number for the MAIN location with 6000.10.

  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating Core Chart of Account Numbers

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

Regenerating ASO Client Accounting

========================================================================

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ASO_Global_GL_Account.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ASO_Global_GL_Account.htm

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

Use the panels in the ASO Global G/L Account Setup form to establish all general ledger accounts for an Administration Services Only (ASO) client. This sets up the global parameters and builds the structure that determines how to assign the account number to codes in PrismHR.

Related Topics

Creating Core Chart of Account Numbers

Building Structure for Chart of Accounts Segments

Regenerating ASO Client Accounting

========================================================================

Maintaining Client and Employee Allocation Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ASO_Payroll_Accounting_Setup.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ASO_Payroll_Accounting_Setup.htm

Maintaining Client and Employee Allocation Parameters

Use the ASO Global G/L Account Setup form to maintain client and employee allocation parameters, account prefix and suffix values for general ledger accounts, and the accounting system download file type for ASO companies. You can also copy all ASO accounting setup data from one client to another using the Copy G/L To Another Client section.

[Image: screenshot]

To maintain client and employee allocation parameters:

  1. Select Allocate Company Contributions to allocate client contributions to cost accounting in the same proportion as the time sheet earnings.

  2. Select Allocate Employee Deductions to allocate employee deductions in the same proportion as the time sheet earnings.

Note: Note: You can enter prefixes or suffixes only if allowed by the G/L accounts.

  1. Select each Account Prefix used by the client, if any.

  2. Select each Account Suffix used by the client, if any.

  3. Select the type of Segment Delimiter that separates the client’s G/L account segments, if any.

  4. Enter the Core Account Segment No of the account number that contains the G/L account setup.

  5. Select the third-party Accounting System Type used by the client to create download files in the corresponding format.

Accounting packages that use comma-delimited text files can use the Peachtree format; it is also the generic choice for accounting system type.

  1. Enter the Name of Output File to specify the name of the file that the system creates for the client accounting download, if any.

  2. Click Save.

Copying ASO Accounting Setup Data

To help reduce the manual labor and margin for error associated with a manual entry, you can copy all ASO accounting setup data from one client to another using the Copy G/L To Another Client section.

To copy ASO accounting setup data from one client to another:

  1. In the Copy G/L To Another Client section, enter or select the Client ID. If you select the Client ID, the Select Client list displays. Search for the client by entering the Client ID or Client Name, then filter the selection further by selecting the Service Type and Status. The clients that match your entry display.

  2. After you select a client, that entry displays back in the Copy G/L To Another Client section.

  3. Select Copy G/L to Client. Note the following:

  1. After clicking Yes in the confirmation message, the copy process starts. Note the following:
  1. After the copy process finishes, the active record displays on the active form and the following confirmation message displays, “ASO Accounting records have successfully been copied to client <selected Client ID>.”

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

Working with Auto Holiday Pay Days

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Auto_Holiday_Pay_Days.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Auto_Holiday_Pay_Days.htm

Working with Auto Holiday Pay Days

You can use the Auto Holiday Pay Days form to define which days apply to employee holiday time. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Access this form by selecting the Days link on the Auto Holiday Pay form. (See Adding Auto Holiday Pay.)

To set up employee holiday days:

  1. Enter the Year where you want to apply the holiday.

  2. Click the Holiday Dates grid to select a date from the calendar.

  3. Click Save.

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Maintaining Auto Holiday Pay Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Auto_Holiday_Pay_Rule_Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Auto_Holiday_Pay_Rule_Maintenance.htm

Maintaining Auto Holiday Pay Rules

You can use the Auto Holiday Pay Rule Maintenance form to define the rules which determine the amount of automatic holiday pay for employees and how many hours they receive. In addition, you can edit an existing rule to make updates.

Note: Access this form by selecting the New Rule link on the Auto Holiday Pay form. (See Adding Auto Holiday Pay.)

To set up paying employee holiday time:

  1. Select the client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Auto Holiday Pay. The Auto Holiday Pay form displays.

  3. Click New Rule. The Auto Holiday Pay Rule Maintenance form displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter or select the parameters to define which employees receive the holiday, then complete the rest of the fields as necessary.

Note: Note the following:

Note: The Auto Holiday Override Hours display on the employee’s timesheet when the criteria for the Auto Holiday Pay Rule and the Override Date exists in the current regular payroll after it is created.

  1. Click Save. The rule displays on the Auto Holiday Pay form.

Note: After you create the rule, the system adds the holiday hours from the rule on that day into the timesheet when you create the payroll. In addition, you can edit or delete the rule by clicking the Line #.

========================================================================

Bill Code ASO Accounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Bill_Code_ASO_Accounts.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Bill_Code_ASO_Accounts.htm

Bill Code ASO Accounts

The Bill Code ASO Accounts panel in ASO Global G/L Account Setup establishes ASO client accounting for all bill codes.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the Bill Code. The Description displays.

  2. Enter the expense Debit Account to debit with the amount of any charges for the bill code. The Account Name displays.

  3. Enter the Credit Account to credit with the amount of any charged for the bill code. The Account Name displays.

  4. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

Defining Billing Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules.htm

Defining Billing Rules

Client billing can be bundled or unbundled:

Note: Note: The billing method (bundled or unbundled) does not affect the invoice format. Both the bill format and the billing template are set on the Billing tab in the Client Details form.

After defining billing rules, you can begin to enter other billing settings on the Billing tab on the Client Details form.

========================================================================

Using Bundled Billing Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Bundled.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Bundled.htm

Using Bundled Billing Rules

Use the Bundled Billing Rules form to establish information for charging one fee per workers’ compensation class for FUTA, SUTA, FICA, and workers’ compensation. You can “bundle” benefit billing based on the workers’ compensation code.

You can use the Bundled Billings Comp Class workers’ compensation code to reflect actual costs that are based on workers’ compensation classifications. You can also set up bundled billing so that each Comp Class has the same billing rate, such as when a client has a flat rate for all classes of employees.

To set up bundled billing:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Billing Rules (Bundled).

  3. Fill in these fields as required.

Field Description
Billing Rule Enter an existing Billing Rule ID, or click New Rule to create a new bundled billing rule. The system automatically assigns an ID.
Workers’ Compensation Code Enter the Workers’ Compensation Code for this bundled billing rule.
Price Code If appropriate, select the Price Code to use instead of the standard billing rate. The Price Code overrides the Bundled Rate set on the Bundled Billing Rule panel for any employee assigned to this job code and a matching Price Code. Use this field if an employee is granted special pricing (rather than using the standard bundled rate and with an employee-specific add-on unbundled rule, which is more common).
Bundled Rate Enter the Bundled Rate to use when billing the client for this workers’ compensation code. This percentage is multiplied by the Unadjusted Gross Taxable pay.
Special Bundled Rate If required, enter the Special Bundled Rate to use for a specific date range.
Special Rate From Date Enter the date when the Special Bundled Rate begins. Payrolls before this date do not use the rate.
Special Rate To Date Enter the date when the Special Bundled Rate ends. Payrolls after this date do not use the rate.
Rule Start Date/Rule End Date If the rule only applies during a specific date range: - Enter the Rule Start Date when this rule begins. - Enter the Rule End Date when this rule ends.
  1. If Bundled Tiers (Optional) are required:
  1. If bundled rules exist for the client, they display in the Existing Bundled Rules panel.

  2. Click Save.

========================================================================

Using Unbundled Billing Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled.htm

Using Unbundled Billing Rules

Use the Billing Rules (Unbundled) form to create the individual fees you charge to your clients.

To set unbundled billing rules:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Billing Rules (Unbundled). The Billing Rules (Unbundled) form displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Billing Rule Enter or select an existing Billing Rule ID, or click New Rule to create a new unbundled billing rule. The system automatically assigns an ID.
Rule Description Enter a Rule Description.
Rate Enter the billing Rate. The system uses this in conjunction with the Based On value.
Based On Select a Based On value, which represents the logic to use when calculating the rate. For more information about “based on” options, see Using Unbundled Bill Rules Based On Options.
Use Timesheet Location Or State Only displays for rules based on Percent of Wages or Percent of WorkerComp Billed. If enabled, the billing rule targets the location or state billed on the time sheet.
Rule Start Date/Rule End Date If the rule only applies during a specific date range: - Enter the Rule Start Date when this rule begins. - Enter the Rule End Date when this rule ends.
  1. Click Save.

Tiered Billing Grid

Certain billing methods involve setting up different bill rates based on the number of employees in a given group. The tiered billing grid displays when this is the case.

[Image: screenshot]

The table provides three columns:

For example, if the grid represents administrative fees, you can charge a $40 fee per employee for the first 20 employees, a $20 fee for the next 20 employees, and so on.

Other Settings

Entering Tax Criteria (available when Based On is set to Tax-Code Based Rule)

Setting Up Other Unbundled Billing Rule Parameters (found in the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

)

Related Topic

Using Unbundled Bill Rules Based On Options

========================================================================

Setting Up Other Unbundled Billing Rule Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled_Addtl_Conds.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled_Addtl_Conds.htm

Setting Up Other Unbundled Billing Rule Parameters

Set up additional unbundled billing rule parameters with the Additional Conditions form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Billing Rules (Unbundled).

  3. From the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] , select Additional Conditions.

  4. Fill in the fields as required.

Field Description
Select the option as appropriate for ACH For ACH (applicable only if the unbundled billing rule is based on a flat amount): - Use If Any ACH: Apply this billing rule on a voucher with ACH. - Use Per ACH Line: Charge a fee for each ACH line. - Use If Electronic Stub: Applies only to electronic pay stubs.
  1. Click Close.

Parent Topic

Using Unbundled Billing Rules

========================================================================

Using Unbundled Bill Rules Based On Options

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled_Based_On_Options.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled_Based_On_Options.htm

Using Unbundled Bill Rules Based On Options

You can use these options as the basis for calculating unbundled billing rules.

Note: Note the following:

Use the Based On options as follows:

Based On Calculation
Units Enter the flat amount to calculate per unit paid. For example, one unit of bonus pay with a Rate amount of 10 ($10.00) generates a $10.00 admin fee.
Hours Worked Enter the flat amount to calculate per hour worked. For example, 40 hours worked with a Rate amount of 10 ($10.00) generates a $400.00 admin fee.
Percent of Wages Enter the percent of wages to charge. For example, $1270.00 of gross wages with a Rate amount of 10 (10%) generates a $127.00 admin fee.
Amt per Check (One Per Voucher will Fire) Enter the flat amount to bill per check. For example, 100 vouchers with a Rate amount of 1 ($1.00) generates a $100.00 admin fee.
Flat Amount Bills the client this amount for each employee and each check. For example, two employees and three total checks (one employee receives two checks) with a Rate amount of 10 ($10.00) generates a $30.00 Admin fee.
Flat Amount / Invoice Bills the client this amount per invoice generated. For example, two invoices and a Rate amount of 50 ($50.00) generates a $100.00 Admin fee.
Flat Amount / Paid EE (only once per EE) Triggers the flat amount only once per employee in the payroll batch. For example, if an employee receives a regular, supplemental, and vacation voucher on the same payroll, the billing rule triggers only once. If there were two employees and four total vouchers with a Rate amount of 10 ($10.00), the system generates a $20.00 Admin fee.
Flat Amount / Paid EE sets IMIN basis. (Must also have 0 IMIN) Determines an invoice minimum based on an amount per employee. For example, if the Rate amount is 7.5, then two employees, one with $7.00 admin fee and another with $10.00 admin fee would not trip the value of $15.00. (If you selected Based On Employee Minimum, the first employee would generate a $0.50 fee, and there would be no fee for the second employee.) > Note: Note the following: - If you define one rule with Monthly Rate/52 weeks, and another with Monthly Rate/48 weeks, the system uses only one per voucher. - The Flat Amount / Paid EE sets IMIN basis. (Must also have 0 IMIN) and Invoice Minimum = Only One of these options must be the last billing rules that the system calculates. If either exists as a Billing Rule, the system will resort the rules so they calculate last.

Using Unbundled Billing Rules

Entering Tax Criteria

Setting Up Other Unbundled Billing Rule Parameters

Setting Up Form W-2 Billing Fees

========================================================================

Entering Tax Criteria

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled_Tax_Criteria.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Billing_Rules_Unbundled_Tax_Criteria.htm

Entering Tax Criteria

Enter tax criteria by setting Based On in unbundled billing to Tax-Code Based Rule. The Tax Criteria panel displays.

[Image: Tax Criteria panel, featuring the EE and ER Tax Codes grids]

  1. Go to the Tax Criteria panel and complete the following fields for the employee tax criteria:

Field — Description

EE Tax Codes — Enter each of the EE Tax Codes (employee tax deduction codes) to associate with this billing rule.

Per Employee — Indicate whether to charge the code Per Employee. If not, then the system assesses the charge once per payroll batch.

Bill Rate — Enter the Bill Rate to charge on the code.

F/P — Indicate whether the amount is a Flat Rate or a Percent.

  1. Complete the following fields for the employer tax criteria:

Field — Description

ER Tax Codes — Enter each ER Tax Codes (employer tax deduction codes) to associate with this billing rule.

Per Employee — Indicate whether to charge the code Per Employee. If not, then the system assesses the charge once per payroll batch.

Bill Rate — Enter the Bill Rate to charge on the code.

F/P — Indicate whether the amount is a Flat Rate or a Percent.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Using Unbundled Billing Rules

========================================================================

Defining Certified Payroll Report Format Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Certified_Payroll_Report_Parameters.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Certified_Payroll_Report_Parameters.htm

Defining Certified Payroll Report Format Parameters

You can set up the Certified Payroll Report to automatically run with payroll. Use the Certified Payroll Report Format Parameters form to define the format parameters for this report.

Note: Note: This report executes only for regularly scheduled, weekly payrolls (AUTORUN version), and displays information about wages and payroll for all employees. It does not execute for the ON-DEMAND version. (To run that version of the report, see Certified Payroll Report.)

To define the Certified Payroll Report format parameters:

  1. Go to the Certified Payroll Report Format Parameters form and complete the following fields.

Field Name — Description

Format — Select the Format from the drop-down. Note: Currently, this report only supports the Federal Government version.

Include Gender on the Report — Select Include Gender on the Report, if needed.

Include Ethnicity — Select Include Ethnicity, if needed.

Include Employee Address — Select Include Employee Address, if needed.

Employee Identifier — Select an Employee Identifier you want to use in the report: (Full Social Security Number, Last Four Digits of Social, Employee ID, or None).

Show zero work weeks — Select this field to include projects that did not have any work to display in the Certified Payroll Report, essentially providing you with a zero report (all amounts listed in the report display as zero). If you do not select this field and there was no project work during the requested date, an error message displays.

Show extended rate of pay up to 4 decimal places — Select this field to display the pay rate in the same format that displays on vouchers, which display up to four decimal places.

Allocate Deductions/Taxes by Project — Select Allocate Deductions/Taxes by Project to calculate deductions and taxes. Selecting this field sets the calculation to allocate by project total. When unchecked, the allocation is based on gross pay.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Change Reason History- Client Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Change-Reason-History-Client_Details.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Change-Reason-History-Client_Details.htm

Change Reason History- Client Details

Use this form to get the change reason history for the Client Details form.

Note: Note: This form will be able to capture the change reason history only if the field named Require change reason on critical forms on the System Parameters form is either selected as Optional (and the user has entered a reason for record update) or Required. When you make any change to the Client Details form, you will be presented with the following dialog box. Once you record the reason for the change herein, the same will be presented in the Change Reason History form.

[Image: screenshot]

To access the form, under the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

on the Client Details form, click Change Reason History.

On this form the following two fields are available:

Click Close to close this form and return to the base form.

========================================================================

Changing SUTA Flags on Payroll Vouchers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Change-SUTA-Flag-Vouchers.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Change-SUTA-Flag-Vouchers.htm

Changing SUTA Flags on Payroll Vouchers

Run this process to update previously existing pay vouchers and change SUTA Reporting Entity from Client to PEO (or vice versa). You must run a tax register rebuild to ensure that subsequent payrolls are correct. Once this process is complete, an acknowledgment message is sent out stating the number of updated vouchers. Acknowledgment of this message generates a report showing the vouchers that were edited.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To change SUTA flags on vouchers:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] .

  2. From Employer|Action, select Change SUTA Flag on Vouchers (PEO/Client).

  3. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Tax Codes/Tax Description Select the tax deduction code you want to update. This code must be a SUTA code. Once a code is selected, it fills in the description field.
Reporting Select PEO or Client to determine a report type. Vouchers are changed to this reporting type for the value selected here.
Special Option Determines how individual tax is accumulated and reported. Options are: - A - Auto-assigns state unemployment insurance (SUI) based on the current configuration. - C - Forces Client SUI Reporting Only Basis.
Note: Values entered in Reporting and Special Option determine the method used by the system to update the Entity and Client Reporting Only fields on the Employer Payroll Tax Detail record. \ Update SUTA Reporting On Payroll Vouchers Record Fields \ Update Methodology \ \ \ — \ — \ — \ \ PEO/Client Reporting \ Special Option \ \ \ P \ Blank \ Entity = P, Client Reporting Only = N \ \ C \ Blank \ Entity = C, Client Reporting Only = null \ \ P \ C \ Entity = P, Client Reporting Only = Y \ \ P or C \ A \ The update utility uses the same method (UTL.GET.SUTA.BASIS) that runs during the payroll initialization process. This method looks at: 1. The Service Type field on the Client Details record. 2. The Tax Basis parameters on the State Processing rule record for the applicable state. 3. The Client SUI reporting fields on the Client Details form that override the settings on the State record to determine what the values of the ‘Entity’ and ‘Client Reporting Only’ field will be set to. Since the Service Type field on the Client Details record affects the outcome when this special option is used, the option to override the service type for the Client ID entered is provided. This option is only available when a Client ID is entered. It is meant to be used when a client’s service type has changed and you want the update program to use a service other than the one currently found on the Client Details record for the client entered. \
Update SUTA Reporting On Payroll Vouchers Record Fields Update Methodology
PEO/Client Reporting Special Option
P Blank Entity = P, Client Reporting Only = N
C Blank Entity = C, Client Reporting Only = null
P C Entity = P, Client Reporting Only = Y
P or C A The update utility uses the same method (UTL.GET.SUTA.BASIS) that runs during the payroll initialization process. This method looks at: 1. The Service Type field on the Client Details record. 2. The Tax Basis parameters on the State Processing rule record for the applicable state. 3. The Client SUI reporting fields on the Client Details form that override the settings on the State record to determine what the values of the ‘Entity’ and ‘Client Reporting Only’ field will be set to. Since the Service Type field on the Client Details record affects the outcome when this special option is used, the option to override the service type for the Client ID entered is provided. This option is only available when a Client ID is entered. It is meant to be used when a client’s service type has changed and you want the update program to use a service other than the one currently found on the Client Details record for the client entered.
Start Pay Date/End Pay Date Start: The date to start updating payroll vouchers. End: The date to stop updating payroll vouchers.
Employer ID Optional: Changes SUTA for a specific employer.
Client ID Optional: Changes SUTA for a specific client.
Employee ID Optional: Changes SUTA for a specific employee.
Override service type Forces the client service type used when the service type for the client has changed (Special Option set to A). Options are: - ASO - Administrative Services Only - PEO - Professional Employer Services - PAY - Processing Payroll Only - ASA - Administrative Services/Alt. Billing - COR - Corporate Payroll - HRN - HR Services - No Payroll
File Type Determines the output type for reports: Text only, or CSV.
Rebuild Vouchers Flag Whether to Update Existing Vouchers with the new SUTA flag information, or Create New Adjustment Vouchers to reflect the change.
Send to Mastertax This field is only available if Rebuild Vouchers Flag is set to “Create New Adjustment Vouchers”. If Yes, the MasterTax PTS file will display the wages and taxes associated with the original SUTA flag as negative values. The PTS file also displays the updated amounts as positive values associated with the new SUTA flag.
  1. Click Run. Here is a report example in .txt format. [Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Setting Check Journal Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Check_Journal_Report_Parameters.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Check_Journal_Report_Parameters.htm

Setting Check Journal Report Parameters

Use the Payroll Check Journal Report Parameters form to determine the format for the report during payroll processing.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

[Image: Payroll Check Journal Report Parameters]

To set the Check Journal Report parameters:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.

  2. In the Other Parameters panel, select the appropriate settings to include in or exclude from the report:

Select this field: — To do the following:

Display Pay Codes Using Timesheet Detail Format — Uses the same detail as the time sheet and voucher

Include Expense Reimbursements — Includes expense reimbursement pay codes

Include Non-Cash Pay Codes — Includes non-cash as well as cash pay codes

Include ‘Employee Total Expense’ on Report — Includes the Employee Total Expense, which is the sum of all pay and contributions

Sort on Codes instead of Descriptions — Sorts by code rather than description

Suppress Employee Names on the Report — Excludes employee sort names from the report

Consolidate Report Totals by Pay Code Only — Displays the totals by pay code, rather than detail lines

Exclude Check Detail Information — Excludes detailed check information (check number, check date, and period start and end dates), allowing users to see more employees per page

Display Zero Hours/Units For Fringe Pay Codes — Displays zero hours or units for fringe pay codes

Split Hours and Units Columns — Enters a page break on the primary sort field

Generate Page Break — Enters a page break on the primary sort field

  1. Select the Report Type.

  2. Select the Report Format.

  3. Click Save.

========================================================================

Setting Up Messages for All Employees for Clients

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Check_Message_Client.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Check_Message_Client.htm

Setting Up Messages for All Employees for Clients

You can set up messages for employees of the client using the Check Messages form.

To access this form, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select Check Message from the Actions menu.

  4. Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
Start Date Enter a date when the message begins displaying.
End Date Enter the date when the message stops displaying.
Message Text Enter text for the message.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Creating Text Messages

Setting Up Messages for Employees

========================================================================

Configuring Client-specific Global PTO Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client%20Global%20PTO%20Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client Global PTO Maintenance.htm

Configuring Client-specific Global PTO Parameters

Use the Client Global PTO Maintenance form to view and configure client-specific Global PTO parameters.

To access this form, click Client. Under Client|Change, click Client Global PTO Maintenance.

To configure client-specific Global PTO parameters:

Field Name — Description

Excluded Plans by State — This field is optional. This form provides the ability to exclude full states from the Global PTO enrollment and accrual process. This option is intended for clients who may be required to provide State Sick Leave in certain states but not all. If you want to, you can now exclude certain Global PTO Benefit Plans from the enrollment and accrual once the client is enabled for Global PTO. - State - You can enter the two digit state codes manually or you can click the State hyperlink and select them from the Select States (permitted list of States Code records configured on the State Rules form) dialog box. You cannot select a state here that is already listed in the Global PTO Plan Overrides section below. - Description - This field automatically populates the state name once the State field is populated.

Excluded Plans by ID — This field is optional. If multiple Global PTO Benefit plans exist on the State Rules form for a state, and you need to prevent enrollment and accrual in one or more plans for that state for the client, you can enter the specific Global PTO Benefit Plan IDs here. If a client has Global PTO Benefit Plan IDs configured under this field, then the system ignores creation and/or accrual of any Global PTO plan(s) identified in this field. - Exclude Plans by ID - You can enter the Global PTO Benefit Plan IDs manually or you can click the Exclude Plans by ID hyperlink and select them from the Select Global PTO Benefit Plans dialog box. You cannot select a state here that has already listed having Global PTO Plan Overrides. - Description - This field automatically populates the Global PTO Benefit Plan description once the Exclude Plans by ID field is populated.

Global PTO Plan Overrides — When Global PTO Plan Override rules are configured, this section will display all existing Global PTO override rules for the client. You can click on the number hyperlink under the “Line #” column to open the Global PTO Client Override form to view the override rules for that state. You can make changes to the override rules on that form and save the changes which will reflect here upon editing. The following columns display for this section: - Line # - State - Plan ID - I/E - Employee Type - I/E - Pay Method - Override Plan ID

Sort By — This field is drop-down. You can select the sort order for the list above by any one of the following options: - Order Applied (Default) - State - Plan ID - Employee Type - Pay Method - Override Plan ID

  1. Click Save to save the changes.

  2. Click New Rule to open the Global PTO Client Override form. (See Configuring Client-specific Global PTO Override Rules.)

========================================================================

Maintaining Client Contact and Account Assignment Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Account.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Account.htm

Maintaining Client Contact and Account Assignment Information

You can set contact and account assignment information with the Account tab on the Client Details form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.
  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.
  3. Click the Account tab.

Adding and Editing Contact Information

Specify new contacts and edit existing contacts in the Contact Information panel:

Designating Employee Representatives

Specify employee representatives for each account type (for example, Payroll) with the Account Assignments panel.

Note: Note: These employee representatives do not influence the approval process. Users should contact them for informational purposes only.

  1. Enter a user ID or click the field name and select an ID from the Search users list to assign the account representatives for each role. The users must have the appropriate account management role assigned to their User account.

Note: You can only enter service providers in the Payroll, Human Resources, Benefits, Risk, Sales, Coordinator, Broker, Print/Mail User, and Backup Assignments employee representative account type fields. (The Print/Mail User field only displays when the client’s global configuration is set to Separate Print/Ship Functions.)

  1. Click Save.

Specifying a Mailing Address

Set a company’s mailing address with the Mailing Address panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Address, City, State — Enter the company’s mailing Address. Enter a company’s mailing address and business location (city and state).

ZIP Code — Enter a company’s zip code. Use the ZIP+4 format if required.

Bill using this Client’s Address — Send a company’s billing to the address of another company by entering the recipient company ID in this field.

  1. Click Save.

Customizing My Support Team Dashboard Contacts

Assign contacts that display on the My Support Team Dashboard with the Customize My Support Team Dashboard panel.

Enter the contact name or click the field name and select a name from the Search users list that displays.

Note: To display the Customize My Support Team Dashboard panel, you must first enable the DASH_SUPPORT_TEAM_ADD custom feature code. After enabling this custom feature code, the Customizable My Support Team Fields panel displays on the System Parameters form where you can add a description for each custom field, which determines how these fields display on the Account tab. (See the PrismHRSystem Administration Guide.)

Establishing Bank Accounts

Specify bank account information for a client with the Bank Accounts panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Payroll Check Account — Enter or select information for the account payroll checks are drawn from.

Direct Deposit Account — Enter or select information for the account direct deposit (ACH) amounts are drawn from. If left blank, the Payroll Check Account is used.

Garnishment Check Account — Enter or select information for the account wage garnishments for the employees of a company are drawn from.

Manual Checks Account — Enter or select the account manual checks are drawn from. This field is required if manual checks are entered with the Pay Check Calculator form.

On Demand Checks Account — Enter or select the account that manual checks are drawn from for On Demand Check processing. (See Processing On Demand Checks.)

Reverse Wire Account — Enter the checking account number used with the reverse wire transfer. Important! The reverse wire process does not work for internal processing. (You cannot make an entry in the Reverse Wire Account field if the active client is set up for internal ACH processing on the System Parameters form.) Note: The system validates this checking account, so you cannot enter an account that is linked to an ACH originator set up for a reverse wire transfer in any other bank account fields, except for the reverse wire transfer account. After entering the checking account number a warning displays, “Warning, you must make arrangements with the bank and with the client before setting up a reverse-wire-transfer.” Click OK to continue, then perform the tasks listed in the warning.

Child Support EFT Account — Enter or select information for the account child support garnishments are electronically drawn from.

Receipts Account — Enter or select information for the account used for ACH or Credit Card receipts.

Third Party Check Account — Enter or select information for the account third party checks are drawn from.

Pay Card Account — Enter or select information for the account used to pay cards/debit cards.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Adding Auto Holiday Pay

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Auto_Holiday_Pay.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Auto_Holiday_Pay.htm

Adding Auto Holiday Pay

You can use the Auto Holiday Pay form to streamline paying employee holiday time by setting up holiday rules, so your employees are paid this time at the client level. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

Important! An employee’s eligibility for auto holiday hours is based on the first date of the payroll’s pay period when the timesheet/payroll control record is created without regard to effective-dated changes that might fall within the pay period.

Using the Auto Holiday Pay form, you can set up the following:

Important! When you add a new rule and apply it to a current, regular payroll, if you delete the payroll and recreate it to populate those holiday hours, the system does not populate the holiday hours if you select Yes when this message displays, “Do you want to keep the keyed entries and apply them to the new payroll? Note: This will include all previously accepted pay rate changes and leave requests.”

Note: Note the following when creating a rule:

Setting Up Auto Holiday Pay

To set up paying employee holiday time:

  1. Select the client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Auto Holiday Pay. The Auto Holiday Pay form displays.

  3. Click New Rule. The Auto Holiday Pay Rule Maintenance form displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter or select the parameters to define which employees receive the holiday, then complete the rest of the fields as necessary.

Note: Note the following:

Note: The Auto Holiday Override Hours display on the employee’s timesheet when the criteria for the Auto Holiday Pay Rule and the Override Date exists in the current regular payroll after it is created.

  1. Click Save. The rule displays on the Auto Holiday Pay form.

Note: After you create the rule, the system adds the holiday hours from the rule on that day into the timesheet when you create the payroll. In addition, you can edit or delete the rule by clicking the Line #.

  1. Click Days to define the days that apply to the rule. The Auto Holiday Pay Days form displays.

Note: You can also import auto holiday pay days to reduce the amount of manual work required. (See Importing Auto Holiday Pay Days.)

  1. Click Import Rules to import existing import rules for different clients using the Auto Holiday Pay Rules import template in the Data Import Tool. (See Importing Auto Holiday Pay Rules.)

Note: To sort the resulting information, select an option in the Sort By field, then click Save to save the sort updates. However, the option you select in the Sort By field always reverts back to Order Applied the next time you access this form. (The other Sort By options are for viewing purposes only.)

Removing Auto Holiday Pay Time

If an employee no longer receives auto holiday pay due to a change in their Employee Type, Pay Method, or FLSA Exempt status, there are two options available to remove any existing auto holiday pay from the current timesheet:

========================================================================

Specifying Client Billing Options

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Billing.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Billing.htm

Specifying Client Billing Options

Set billing options, electronic billing, rate overrides, and reimbursement rates through the Billing tab in Client Details.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Click the Billing tab.

Specifying Billing Information

Set up requirements for billing the client company with the Billing panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Billing Template Select a template to compute billing for this client. Read-only options display settings for this template: - Bundled: If the selected template is bundled, one administration fee is charged for client billing. If not, an unbundled template charges individual fees. - Use Billing Defaults: The selected template uses default billing rates.
  1. Click Save.

Establishing Electronic Billing Parameters

Set client requirements to pay bills electronically with the Electronic Billing panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
ACH Status Select a direct debit status: - Active: ACH is enabled for the client. Note: When you select Active, a warning displays stating that you must enter the client’s ABA/Routing Number, Account Number, and Account Type (see below). Click OK to continue, then proceed with entering the required information. - Inactive: ACH is not enabled for the client. - ACH by Location: The system uses ACH information from the Worksite Location records. Note: When you select ACH by Location, a warning displays stating that the Bill by Sort (see above) must be set to Location and you must enter the client’s ABA/Routing Number, Account Number, and Account Type in the ACH Details of the Worksite Location (see below). Click OK to continue, then proceed with entering the required information. - ACH by Division: The system uses ACH information from Division records. Note: When you select ACH by Division, a warning displays stating that the Bill by Sort (see above) must be set to Division and you must enter the client’s ABA/Routing Number, Account Number, and Account Type in the ACH Details of the Division (see below). Click OK to continue, then proceed with entering the required information. - Wire Transfer Client: After calculating payroll and reviewing reports, the processor must wait for the client to wire the money before proceeding with payroll. - Prenote: The client is in prenote (preauthorization) status for the account. The effects of the ACH options are further controlled by other settings on the Control tab in the Client Details form. Specifically: ACH Hold Threshold; After Post, Pre Mail Hold; and After Post, Pre Mail Threshold. (For details about these settings, see Setting Client Control Parameters.)
  1. Click Save.

Specifying Fee Rate Overrides

Set rate information for specified bill codes that differ from standard billing event rates with the Fee Rate Overrides panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Bill Event Code — Enter or select each code that requires a rate for this client that differs from the standard billing event rate.

Rate — Enter a standard billing event rate.

Special Rate — Optional: Enter a special rate the client pays during the specified date range.

Spec From — Enter the starting date when a special rate goes into effect.

Spec To — Enter the ending date which is the last day of a special rate for this event.

  1. Click Save.

Specifying Reimbursement Rates

Set billing rate information used for expense reimbursement transactions with the Reimbursement Rates panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Expense Reimbursement Bill Rate Enter an expense reimbursement bill rate.
Exp Reimb Special Rate Optional: Enter a special reimbursement rate.
Special From Date Enter the starting date when a special reimbursement rate goes into effect.
Special To Date Enter the ending date which is the last day of a special reimbursement rate.
  1. Click Save.

Specifying Billing Rate Overrides

Set billing rates for social security (OASDI), medicare, and/or federal unemployment taxes (FUTA) with the Billing Rate Overrides panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
As Of Date Enter the date to specify when the override begins for each billing rate override.
OASDI/Medicare/FUTA Enter the rates to apply for OASDI, Medicare, and FUTA, as appropriate.
  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Setting Commission Levels

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Commissions.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Commissions.htm

Setting Commission Levels

You can set commission levels for service provider salespeople that earn commissions based on client activity using the Commission Maintenance form.

Note: You can access this form by selecting Commissions on the Actions menu in the Client Details form.

You can enter more than one commission schedule for a salesperson, and those can be in effect during different time periods or simultaneously. For example, a salesperson can simultaneously receive commissions based on gross wages as well as active lives (active employees).

The system calculates commissions during the specified date range. If the period covered by the From Date and To Date for one or more salespeople overlap, the system computes all those schedules during that time period.

Note: Note the following:

To set commission levels, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select Commissions from the Actions menu.

  4. Complete these fields as required in the Commission Maintenance panel.

Field Name Description
Salesperson In the Salesperson field, enter the user ID of an employee at your organization who is a sales representative associated with the client.
From Date Enter the From Date on which the commission level goes into effect.
To Date Enter the To Date on which the commission level expires.
There are two ways to calculate commissions, simple or complex. To calculate simple commissions:
Amount Enter the commission amount as a flat amount or a percentage.
Flat or Percent Indicate if the commission amount is Flat or Percent.
Based On Indicate what the commission is based on. The following Based On options work with the Percent option (see above): - Gross Wages: Total gross wages of the client payroll invoice. - Admin Fees: Total amount of administrative fees on the client payroll invoice. - Benefit Commission Type: Benefits-based commission for a specific benefit type. (You must enter the benefit type code in the Based on Item field.) - Benefit Commission Percentage: Percentage based on the benefit list. (You must enter the specific group benefit plan ID in the Based on Item field.) - Workers Comp: Total amount of workers’ compensation billed to the client for the payroll period. - Workers Compensation Profit: Checks bill code 005 and computes the profit, and also checks for information entered on losses. - Average Number Lives: Average number of active employees as of the period end date of the payroll (regardless of whether the employees were paid in the payroll batch). - Gross Profit: Sales items minus the direct cost items. The value is shown on the Profitability Report in the backend system. - Tax Profit: Sales of tax-based items (such as FUTA and SUTA) minus the cost for those tax items. Tax profit is rarely used for commissions because when not passing shelter credits it can often show a loss for the month. - Percent of Bill Code: Fixed percentage for the amount charged on a specific bill code. (You must enter the percentage in the Based on Item field.) - Profits to Admin (Enter Bill Code in Based On): The system uses the specified Bill Code and then subtracts the cost associated with that Bill Code. That amount (profit or loss) is used in the percent computation. For example, if you choose Bill Code 004 (SUTA) and specify 5% of profits, and there was $1000 in sales and $960 in costs, the payout would be $2.00 ($40.00 x 0.05). - Percent of Target Amount: Percent commission based on the amount set in the Target Amount field. (This option only works with the Percent commission amount option, see above. The Flat or Percent field automatically defaults to Percent.) The following Based On options work with the Flat option (see above): - Fixed Amount Group 1–5: Sets a flat amount that a user can elect to include when running Compute Commissions. - Fixed per Paid Employee: Flat commission based on the number of employees paid in the commission cycle. Note: If you select a Based On option that is invalid for the selected Flat or Percent option an error message displays, “<Based On Option> ‘based-on’ codes will not support <XXX> Amounts.” Click OK to continue.
  1. Complete these fields as required in the Target Maintenance panel.
Field Name Description
From Date Enter the From Date when the target amount goes into effect.
To Date Enter the To Datewhen the target amount expires.
Type Categorize the target by selecting one of the following options: - Annual Projection: - Annual Projection Adjustment: - Annual Projection Final: - Amortization: - Termination:
  1. Click Accept.

  2. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Creating Commission Structures

========================================================================

Setting Client Control Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Controls.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Controls.htm

Setting Client Control Parameters

You can set operational parameters for a client using the Control tab settings on the Client Details form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Click the Control tab.

Setting Payroll Processing Parameters

Set payroll processing parameters for a client with the Process Controls panel.

To set these parameters:

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Do Not Service Select to disable payroll processing.
Worksite Time Sheet Entry Select if users at the worksite enter time sheet information.
Processing Schedule Enter a payroll processing schedule for this client.
Worksite Payroll Approval Select one of the following options to determine the payroll approval process for the client: - Disabled: Select this option if you do not want the client to approve payrolls before the payroll is finalized. Important! If you disable the Worksite Payroll Approval field even though the Payroll Finalization Notification field is set to Email, the system stops sending finalization emails to the client. - Standard: Select this option if you want the client to perform a one-step payroll approval before the payroll is finalized (that is, after calculation). - Multistep: Select this option if you want the client to perform at least two payroll approval steps before the payroll is finalized (that is, after calculation). Note: When you select the Multistep option, the following message displays: “Approval Steps must be defined under Approval Policies to fully activate Multistep Approvals. If steps are not defined, this setting will work the same as Standard worksite payroll approval.” Click OK to continue. The following scenarios describe what happens when you enable the Multistep option: - After selecting the Multistep option and then clicking Save, the following message displays, “Approval Steps must be defined under Approval Policies to fully activate Multistep Approvals. Would you like to define them now?” The following happens depending on your answer: - Yes: The Approval Policies form automatically displays. - No: The save process continues. - After setting up payroll approval using the Multistep option and defining approval steps at the approval-policy level and then changing the Worksite Payroll Approval setting to either Disabled or Standard, when you click Save a message displays, “Changing the Worksite Payroll Approval Type will clear all previously defined approval steps for Multistep Payroll Approval. Do you wish to continue?” The following happens depending on your answer: - Yes: The system clears the client-level approval policy record for multistep payroll approval. - No: The system cancels this setup change and returns the Worksite Payroll Approval option to the original Multistep setting.
  1. Click Save.

Specifying General Ledger Template

Specify a general ledger template with the Employer Accounting panel that associates between benefit plans, retirement plans, billing codes, or pay codes to general ledger accounts.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

G/L Template — Click the G/L Template link to select a template to use for checking accounts, accounts receivable, or inter-company transaction accounts. These codes permit different clients to use different G/L account numbers for posting. Note: An error message displays if you enter or select an obsoleteG/L Template, and the system will not process a payroll when a client assigned with an obsolete G/L template tries to initiate payroll calculation or finalization.

G/L Code — Enter any required codes. Use G/L Code for general ledger distributions, and Misc G/L Codes for special transactions.

  1. Click Save.

Defining Client Accounting

Specify client accounting with the Client Accounting panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Generate Accounting — Select if a client uses accounting. This causes payroll initialization to fail if all revenues are not accounted for.

Accounting Template — Select an accounting template used by this client.

Override By Position — Select to override the G/L account by Pay Code or Job Code.

Generate ASO Client Accounting — Select for clients that have the Service Type set to Corporate or Staffing who want to use ASO Accounting. This field is hidden if the Service Type is set to something besides Corporate or Staffing. You can only check this field if the client has a set-up record in the ASO.GL.DEFN file. When you run the client accounting download, it prompts you for a payroll number instead of an invoice. It builds the client accounting file by reading and processing ASO Account Journals. > Note: Note: You can not have the Generate Accounting box checked if Generate ASO Client Accounting is enabled.

  1. Click Save.

Setting Up New Hires and Employees

Set up new hires and employees with the New Hire/Employee Detail Controls panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Employee Number Required for EP NH Assign a unique number to new employees.
Auto Employee Number Automatically assign an employee number to new hires.
Allow First Period Hours The Allow First Period Hours drop-down displays if your organization has selected Enable New Hire First Period Hours in System Parameters. Indicates whether users of the New Hire form can enter prorated hours for the new employee for the client if their start date is in the middle of a pay period. This is used for salaried employees who have auto time sheet hours. - System Default: The New Hire form displays the First Pay Period Hours field only if Enable New Hire First Period Hours is selected in System Parameters. - Enabled: The First Pay Period Hours field is available in the New Hire form, regardless of the setting in System Parameters. - Disabled: The New Hire form will not display the First Pay Period Hours field, regardless of the setting in System Parameters.
  1. Click Save.

Configuring Benefits Enrollment and On-boarding

Set up Benefits Enrollment and Onboarding with the Enrollment/Onboarding Controls panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Electronic Enrollment Indicate whether employees use PrismHR enrollment.
Electronic On-Boarding Indicate whether new employees use electronic on-boarding: - Always: Employees always do their own onboarding online. - Never: Employees never do their own onboarding. Instead, administrators enter employee information in the New Hire form. - Prompt: The New Hire form prompts you to indicate whether the employee will complete the onboarding process online, or if you will enter the information in the New Hire form. Note: If you set this field to Null or Never, these conditional fields do not display: - Electronic On-Boarding for Rehires - I-9 Business Address - Allow Upload of Supporting Documents (I-9) - Complete All Forms to Activate Payroll - Enable Benefit Enrollment After Final Submit
  1. Click Save.

Setting Pay Codes

Set pay codes and how they display on pay stubs with the Pay Codes panel. Pay codes entered in this panel are the only pay codes that can be used for the client.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Clone Pay Codes from another client — Copy pay codes from an existing client. This overwrites codes already set up for this client, but you can add codes afterward.

Pay Code — Enter or select each pay code.

Print on Pay Stub — Select a method for the pay code.

  1. Click Save.

Specifying Deduction Codes

Set deduction codes for the client with the Deduction Codes panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Clone Deductions from another client — Copy deduction codes from an existing client. This overwrites codes already set up for this client, but you can add codes afterward.

Deduction Code — Enter or select each deduction code.

Print on Pay Stub — Select a method for the deduction code.

Worksite User Selectable — Select Yes if this deduction code should be available to worksite users.

  1. Click Save.

Entering Voluntary or Employee Loan Deduction Codes

Enter or select voluntary or employee loan deduction codes that can go into arrears for a client with the Arrears panel.

To enter voluntary or employee loan deduction codes, do the following:

  1. Go to the Arrears panel and complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Clone Arrears codes from another client — Copy arrears deduction codes from an existing client. This overwrites codes already set up for this client, but you can add codes afterward.

Voluntary/Employee Loan Deductions To Arrears — Enter or select each code that can go into arrears.

  1. Click Save.

Specifying Employee Types

Enter or select the employee type codes you would like to display to this client. If you leave this table empty, the client can use any employee types in the system. If you specify one or more types here, the client will only be able to use the specified types.

Note: Note: The settings configured here will apply to any Service Provider, Worksite Manager, and Worksite Trusted Advisor users associated with the client.

To set up employee type codes:

  1. Locate the Employee Types panel.

  2. Enter or select the appropriate Employee Types. A Description will populate next to each type.

  3. Click Save.

Entering Employee Statuses

Enter or select the employee statuses in this panel that you would like to display to this client. If you leave this table empty, the client can see all employee statuses on the forms as any user type. If you specify one or more employee statuses in this panel, the client will only be able to see the specified statuses in the following forms: Reactivation, Rehire, Status Type Change, and Employee Termination.

Note: Note: The settings configured here will apply to any Service Provider, Worksite Manager, and Worksite Trusted Advisor users associated with the client.

To enter employee statuses:

  1. Locate the Employee Statuses panel.

  2. Enter or select the appropriate Employee Statuses. A Description will populate next to each type.

  3. Click Save.

Defining Reason Codes

Enter or select the reason codes in this panel that you would like to display to this client. If you leave this table empty, the client can use any reason codes in the system. If you specify one or more reason codes in this panel, the client will only be able to use the specified codes in the following forms: Leave of Absence, Pay Rate Change, Reactivation, Rehire, Status Type Change, and Employee Termination.

Note: Note: The settings configured here will apply to any Service Provider, Worksite Manager, and Worksite Trusted Advisor users associated with the client.

To define reason codes:

  1. Locate the Reason Codes panel.

  2. Enter or select the appropriate Reason Codes. A Description will populate next to each type.

  3. Click Save.

Reporting

Set allocation formats used by a client with the Reporting panel.

  1. Select each of the Allocation Formats Allowed.

  2. Click Save.

========================================================================

Specifying Client Custom Feature Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Custom_Feature_Codes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Custom_Feature_Codes.htm

Specifying Client Custom Feature Codes

Customize feature codes in Client Details to set special features for the client. The codes in this table are the most common codes available for general use. To implement custom codes, contact the PrismHR Customer Support Team.

Custom Feature Code Description
ALLOWWMNEWHIREALTEMP.C Allows users of the New Hire form to select an alternate employer defined in Client Details instead of the client’s primary employer. This applies to worksite managers and trusted advisors associated with this client.
BATCH-PAYMENTS-CHANGE-DEFAULTS-C Allocates batch payments. Note: You must set the BATCH-PAYMENTS-CHANGE-DEFAULTS (system level) and BATCH-PAYMENTS-CHANGE-DEFAULTS-C (client level) custom feature codes to display the Edit Employee Details column on the Batch Payments form.
BLOCKHRAPPROVALNOTIFY Disables the notification email that is normally sent to the client’s users to let them know the results of their requested HR action (either denied or approved).
CLIENT-ADD-DEPENDENTS-REQ-FIELDS Sets the following additional fields as required on the Employee Dependents form: - First Name - Birth Date - Gender - Social Security Number - Relation

Enabling Specialized Features

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Custom_Features.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Custom_Features.htm

Enabling Specialized Features

Set up specialized features for a client company with the Custom Features form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select Custom Features from the Actions menu.

  4. Enter each custom code that applies to the client, then click Accept.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Specifying Client Custom Feature Codes

========================================================================

Maintaining Third Party Payees Vendor Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Cutback_Payees.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Cutback_Payees.htm

Maintaining Third Party Payees Vendor Information

Use the Third Party Payees form to maintain vendor information.

To maintain vendor information, do the following:

  1. Enter the third party Payee ID.

  2. Enter the actual vendor Payee Name.

  3. In the Remit To Name field, enter the vendor name to print on the check.

  4. Enter the vendor’s address and ZIP Code. The system displays the vendor’s city and state automatically. If there is more than one city associated with that ZIP Code, select the location in the pop-up window.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Client Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Detail_Tab.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Detail_Tab.htm

Maintaining Client Information

Set company information with the Detail tab on the Client Details form.

Establishing Client Information

Specify basic information with the Name & Address panel.

To set client information, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Complete these fields in the Name & Address panel.

Field — Description

Client ID — Enter the unique identifier for the client.

Client Name (DBA) — Enter a ‘doing business as’ name.

Legal Name — Enter the client’s legal name.

Address — Enter the client’s main street address. If there is a separate mailing address, enter that information on the Account tab.

ZIP Code — Enter a zip code. If required, enter ZIP+4 in the Suffix field

City — Enter a city or town location.

State — Select a state from the State drop-down, or refine the search by entering a state name.

Telephone — Enter the main telephone number. Note: You can initiate a Zoom call to the client’s phone number by clicking the Call ( [Image: screenshot] ) icon, if a supported soft phone exists on your computer.

Fax Number — Enter a fax number.

Website — Enter a URL for the client’s web site.

  1. Click Save.

Defining Client Business Information

Set a client’s business information in the Contract panel.

To set business information, do the following:

  1. Complete these fields in the Contract panel.
Field Description
Status The current status of a client. Click the Edit icon [Image: screenshot] to open the form where you can change the client’s status (see Changing the Client Status). (Note: The system displays an error message if you do not save changes to the Client Details form before selecting the Edit icon [Image: screenshot] : “You must save your changes before changing company status.”) Note: This feature is only available to users with the correct permissions.
Status Date Date when the current status went into effect.
Contract Date Enter the date when the contract was signed.
First Pay Date Enter the first payroll date processed for a client. Note the following: - If you enter this date: The period start and end dates will not auto-populate. - If you leave this field blank: When the first, regularly scheduled payroll is posted, this field on the client details record updates with the first check date, period start date, and period end date. These values can all be changed. - The Period Start Date and Period End Date fields are hidden until after the first regular payroll posts. Once the payroll posts, the dates in these fields populate according to the following rules: - If the client’s Status Date is before the determined date of 10/14/2019, the Period Start Date and Period End Date fields will not populate or display. - If the client’s Status Date is equal to or greater than (=>) 10/14/2019, the Period Start Date and Period End Date fields will populate and display. After posting the first regular payroll and the dates populate in these fields, you can change the dates.
  1. Click Save.

Set industry-related information in the Classifications panel.

To define industry-related information, do the following:

  1. Complete these fields in the Classifications panel:

Field — Description

Business Entity Type — Select an entity type, which is used for tax reporting. For example, Limited Liability Corporation.

Business Description — Enter a brief description of the business.

Client Category — Enter a client category (such as CON for Construction), or select a category from the Select Client Category look-up form. You can also refine the search by specifying the Category Description.

SIC Code — Enter the SIC (Standard Industrial Classification) code for this client, or select a code from the SIC Codes Selection look-up form. You can also refine the search by specifying the SIC Code or the Classification. Note: Cursor over the SIC Code and NAICS Code descriptions to display their full name. (A truncated version of each description displays online using ellipses (…).)

NAICS Code — Enter the NAICS (North American Industry Classification System) code for a client’s primary business activity, or select a code from the Select NAICS Code look-up form. (You can also refine the search by specifying the NAICS Code or the Class Description.) Note: If there is no NAICS Code assigned here or the NAICS Code assigned here is obsolete then the EEO-1 build will fail.

International Client — Select to identify the client as an international client. Note: If you enable International Client, the ABA/Routing Number field on the Billing tab changes to Swift Code, so you can bypass standard ABA routing number validation by specifying a particular bank or branch for international money transfers (8-11 characters). (See Specifying Client Billing Options.)

Cost Center — Enter the cost center used to process accounting transactions, or select a cost center from the Cost Center Selection look-up form. You can also refine the search by specifying the Cost Center ID or the Cost Center Name.

Sub-Cost Center — Enter the sub-cost center assigned to a client or select a sub-cost center from the Sub Cost Center Selection look-up form.

Multi-Entity Group/Description — The first three multi-entity groups associated with the client display in alphabetical order. (You can scroll down to view other multi-entity groups.) See Organizing Similar Clients. Note: Select a multi-entity group to display its details in the Multi-Entity Group Details form. (See Creating New Multi-Entity Groups.)

  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Flagging Employers as Certified PEOs

========================================================================

Maintaining Client Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Details.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Details.htm

Maintaining Client Details

Use the Client Details form to maintain company information and settings.

Note: Note: Not all tabs and forms are available to all users.

Most of the information is in the tabs of the form. You can access other information and settings with the Actions menu; see Accessing Features in the Actions Menu.

========================================================================

Managing Client Security Settings

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Details_Security.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Details_Security.htm

Managing Client Security Settings

Use the Security form (accessed through the Client DetailsActions menu

[Image: screenshot]

) to manage the client’s security settings.

Defining Client Security

You can define the Data Security Entities that users can access by specifying the defaults and the settings to which you want to restrict access. Data Security Entities are entities and work assignments that users can set for employees in the Employee Details > Work tab, specifically Location, Division, Department, Shift, or Work Group.

The Data Security Entities in the Client Security panel are the only ones by which your organization can restrict access for the client. If you do not list an item, you cannot restrict user access by that entity. As indicated below, you can restrict client access by location, division, and department. Because shift and work group are not listed, users can access all shift and work group information, if any.

[Image: screenshot]

If the client does not use an entity type (for example, they have only one location), there is probably no reason to include that entity.

For example, if some employees have division assignments and should have access to one or more departments, select Department from Data Security Entity and set Default Access to Full Access. If other employees do not have any department assigned, and you do not want them to have access to department information, set Default Access when Blank to No Access.

  1. For each entity:
a. Select each Data Security Entity.
  1. — Select the Default Access for the entity. This can be changed at the user level; see Defining Users for more information.
  1. — Select the Default Access when Blank to indicate the default behavior if an employee user does not have a value for the entity.
  1. Click Accept.

Maintaining Worksite Users

This panel allows you to manage the worksite users who have access to the client.

[Image: screenshot]

If available, you can:

See Defining Users for information on editing and creating user accounts.

Associating User and Human Resource Roles with a Worksite Manager

Select any role to associate with a worksite manager in the User Roles and Human Resource Roles panels, so managers who have access to set up other managers can only access these user and Human Resources roles for the client.

Suppressing Payroll Warnings

Suppress payroll warnings by selecting a warning in the Payroll Suppress panel.

Maintaining Security Settings for the Client

Use the options in the Access panel to maintain the client’s security settings.

  1. Set sMFA Device Expiration to use the global setting, a different interval period from the global setting, or disable multi-factor authentication for this client. (Note: This setting automatically defaults to 30 Days.)

When enabled, all users associated with this client who access the system will need to re-authenticate their access after the specified time interval, if any, for each device they use (computer, tablet, and so on). The system prompts them to request an authentication code, which it sends to the email address set on their user account (users must have email address). Then the user can enter the authentication code to regain access to the system.

  1. Select the sMFA Enabled for Trusted Advisor Password Reset option to enable multi-factor authentication for all worksite trusted advisors who have access to the client, requiring them to use multi-factor authentication when they use the Forgot Password link.

  2. Select Enable Security for Messages to restrict the users, companies, and so on, that the service provider can select in the New Message form to those that client users can access.

  3. Use the IP White List/Range table to restrict worksite users (managers, trusted advisors, and employees) to a specific IP address or range of addresses. See the examples below.

Using IP White List/Range Examples

Your organization can use the white list to grant the client’s users access only at a specific location, such as an office or home, by specifying the IP addresses or the IP range. In the example below, those users can only access PrismHR from the listed IP addresses (123.123.123.101, 123.123.123.102, and 123.123.123.103).

[Image: screenshot]

Your organization can also specify a range of permitted IP addresses.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note that if you enter a range, you must separate the first and last addresses with a dash and that the first three numbers must match. If the first three numbers do not match, that is not a valid IP address range and the system will ignore it.

[Image: screenshot]

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Maintaining Work-related Employee Information

Editing a Worksite Manager User

Editing a Worksite Trusted Advisor

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

========================================================================

Attaching Files to Client Records

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Documents.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Documents.htm

Attaching Files to Client Records

Attach files to a client record and open files attached to the record with the Client Documents form. To access, select Client > Client Details and select Documents from the Actions menu.

To attach a document:

  1. Click Load a Document.

  2. In the Upload a File window, click Browse.

  3. Navigate to the file that you want to upload and click Open.

  4. Click Submit.

  5. In the Confirm Document form, the Document Name field populates the file name.

  6. Enter any Document Notes.

  7. Click Accept.

Once a document is in the Client Documents list:

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Creating Events to Display in ESS

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Events.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Events.htm

Creating Events to Display in ESS

You can create events that display in Employee Portal (EP) using the Client Events form. The form lists existing events.

To filter the list of events, do the following:

Go to the Client Events form on the Client|Change menu and specify the filters as desired:

Field Description
Organizer Select the Organizer user name to view events by a specific organizer.
From Date/Thru Date Enter or select the From Date and Thru Date to view events within a specific set of dates.

To maintain events, do the following:

Go to the Client Events form on the Client|Change menu and do the following:

Button/Field Description
Add Click Add to create a new event. The Company Events editor displays.
Event Title Click an Event Title to edit an existing event.

Creating or Editing an Event

After clicking Add in the Client Events form, you can create or edit an event in the Company Events editor form that displays.

To create an event, do the following:

  1. In the Company Events editor form, complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Event Title — Enter the Event Title.

Event Date — Enter or select the Event Date.

Start Time/End Time — Enter the Start Time and End Time. You can enter the time by including AM or PM, or enter it in 24-hour format. For example, if you enter 10:00 or 10:00AM, the system displays 10:00AM. If you enter 14:00 or 2:00PM, the system displays 02:00PM.

Organizer — The Organizer field displays the name of the user who created the event.

Details — Enter the Details of the event. At this time, you can only upload documents to an existing event. If you are creating a new event and want to attach a document, you need to save it and reopen it.

  1. To attach documents to the event, click Upload Documents. See Attaching Event Documents

  2. You can limit the employees who will see the event information by specifying certain departments, divisions, shifts, locations, pay groups, and work groups. In the appropriate table, enter the Code for each entity that should see the event.

  3. Click Save.

Attaching Event Documents

You can attach documents to a new event or an existing event.

  1. In the Company Event panel, click Upload Documents.

  2. In the Upload a File window, click Choose File.

  3. Navigate to the file that you want to upload, and then click Open.

  4. Click Submit in the Upload a File form.

  5. In the Confirm Document form, the Document Name field populates with the file name.

  6. Enter any Document Notes.

  7. Click Accept. You return to the Company Event panel.

Once a document displays in the Documents list:

========================================================================

Using Client Notes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Notes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Notes.htm

Using Client Notes

Use the Client Notes form to store notes.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select Client Notes from the Actions menu.

  4. Enter an Employee ID to view notes for a specific employee.

  5. Click Add to create a new note for the client or a specific employee, or view / delete an existing note by clicking the Note ID.

Entering Note Details

Enter any notes regarding the client or a specific employee.

To enter a note:

  1. Enter the Employee ID if this note applies to an employee.

  2. Enter the note in the field provided.

  3. Click Save.

Related Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Creating Notes Templates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Notes_Category.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Notes_Category.htm

Creating Notes Templates

Use the Client Notes Category form to create different types of notes templates, which will be associated with the categories on the Notes tab in the Client Details form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This form is only available for service providers.

To create notes templates:

  1. Enter or select the Category ID. The Category Description displays.

  2. Click Save.

Note: If you select Delete a message displays, “Are you sure you want to delete? This will delete any client notes you have associated with this category.” Click Yes to continue.

========================================================================

Storing Miscellaneous Client Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Notes_Tab.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Notes_Tab.htm

Storing Miscellaneous Client Information

You can store information about the client and the invoice using the Notes tab on the Client Details form. These notes are available to anyone (including clients) who can view the Notes tab.

Important! Any notes you enter in the Invoice Notes box automatically display on the client’s invoice.

Note: Select Audit Client Notes on the Actions menu to view updates to notes.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Click the Notes tab.

  4. Select a Category to associate a note at the client level with a category.

Note: Note the following:

  1. Complete the notes as needed.

  2. Click Save.

Note: The system shortens the text-wrap length when you enter text in the Invoice Notes box and click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Setting Additional Client Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Other.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Other.htm

Setting Additional Client Parameters

Set additional client parameters with the Other tab on the Client Details form. For example:

Note: You can restrict user access for all fields on the Other tab by using the Field setting on the User Roles form. (See the PrismHRSystem Administration Guide.)

To access this form:

  1. Open the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Click the Other tab.

Setting Client Parameters

Set required client parameters with the Other Options panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Position Rates Used Indicates whether bill and pay rates for a client are set by position, or only for payroll. If you use position rates, you must set them up for the positions.
Position Rate Bill Type If bill and pay rates are set by position, select the bill type to indicate whether to bill the amount as a rate or markup factor.
Tax Limit Basis Select to set the taxable limit basis used for client billing: Company or Employer. This overrides the global setting.
Electronic Forms W-2 Select if all employees of the client receive W-2 forms electronically.
Electronic Pay Stubs Select how electronic pay stubs are used: - Employee may not un-enroll: Employees are enrolled in electronic pay stubs by default and cannot un‑enroll. - Employee may un-enroll: Employees are enrolled in electronic pay stubs by default, but can un‑enroll when setting up direct deposit. If an employee opts out, the Un-Enroll in Electronic Pay Stub option must be enabled on the Employee Details>Other tab. - Not Used: Electronic pay stubs are not used. All pay stubs are paper. For more information on how these settings relate to state rules, See Configuring Electronic Pay Stubs.
  1. Click Save.

Setting Payroll Notifications and Reminders

Enable payday email notifications and payroll reminders at the client level if the payroll is still in timesheet entry status as the payroll’s completion date gets closer to the cutoff date.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Payday Notifications Select how payday notifications are used: - Select the Enabled option to enable payday notifications for all employees at the client level. (This setting enables email notifications only.) Employees can opt-out of these notifications in the Employee Portal for this client. They can also receive these notifications through SMS messages. - Select the Disabled option to override the system-level setting for payday notifications.
  1. Click Save.

Assigning Employees to Alternate Employers

Assign employees of the client to alternate employers (different from what is set on the Details tab) with the Alternate Employers panel. For example, if a PEO does business in different states, their employees can be assigned to alternate employers in those states. For these alternate employers, specify the cost center, accounts, and other information.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Employer ID Enter or select each alternate ID. > Note: Note: If a client is assigned to an employer that is a Certified Professional Employer Organization (CPEO) and you try to add a non-CPEO employer in the Alternate Employers panel, a warning message displays. Click Yes to save the record or click No to return to the Client Details form without saving.
Cost Center Enter or select the cost center for employees assigned to the alternate employer. If no value is entered, the system uses the primary cost center for the client.
Checking Account Select the payroll checking account used by the alternate employer.
ACH Account Select the ACH account used by the alternate employer.
New Hire Display Name Enter the new hire display name. When you enter a new hire, this name displays as one of the employer IDs you can select (depending on the Suppress Client Access setting).
Suppress Client Access Indicate whether to suppress access. Options are: - Yes: You cannot select the alternate employer in the New Hire form. - No: You are able to select the alternate employer.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Defining Employee Position Rates

========================================================================

Controlling Client Payroll Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Payroll.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Payroll.htm

Controlling Client Payroll Processing

You can control employee payroll processing and reporting using the Payroll tab in the Client Details form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Click the Payroll tab.

Setting Parameters

Set payroll processing parameters with the Payroll Processing Options panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
One Payroll per Pay Group Do one of the following: - Enable One Payroll per Pay Group to create separate payroll control batches when multiple pay groups have the same pay date. - Disable One Payroll per Pay Group to create one payroll control batch when multiple pay groups have the same pay date. Note: If payroll control batches were created before enabling or disabling One Payroll per Pay Group, you must delete and recreate the batches for the change to take effect.
  1. Click Save.

Setting Alternate Pay Dates

You can set alternate pay dates when a pay date falls on a weekend or holiday with the When Pay Date falls on Weekend and When Pay Date falls on Holiday panels. You can also set the holidays that the client observes with the Holidays Observed panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
When Pay Date falls on Weekend Pay Date falls on Saturday Pay On Pay Date falls on Sunday Pay On For pay dates that fall on a Saturday or Sunday, select a day of the week and whether payroll is delivered before or after the pay date.
When Pay Date falls on Holiday Holiday Day Pay On Day Before/After For pay dates that fall on a holiday: - Select each day of the week to make an adjustment to the payroll delivery day. - Select a pay on day to reschedule the payroll delivery for the corresponding Holiday Day. - Select whether to deliver the payroll on that day before or after the pay date.
  1. Click Save.

Selecting Special Reports

Select special reports to print when a payroll processor posts a payroll batch, or indicate the standard reports that should not print for a client with the Payroll Reports panel. You can also edit default settings for most reports by selecting the Actions menu and Report Parameters.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Report Code Enter or select a code to include or exclude. The report name displays after you make the selection. To add multiple codes at once using the multi-value selector, do the following: 1. Select the + - Report Code field. The Select Payroll Reports list displays. 2. To search for a report, enter the partial or full report name in the Report Name field. For example, enter pay to display all reports that use “pay” in the Report ID. (Instead of searching for the report, you can simply select the report from the list that originally displays when you access the Select Payroll Reports list.) 3. Select the reports you want to add, which the multi-value selector moves to the Selected Reports list. (Note: After you select a report, the system dims it.) In addition, you can do the following: - To add all the displayed reports, click Add All. - To remove all the reports that display in the Selected Reports list, click Remove All. 4. Click Done.
  1. Select the + - Report Code field. The Select Payroll Reports list displays.
  2. To search for a report, enter the partial or full report name in the Report Name field. For example, enter pay to display all reports that use “pay” in the Report ID. (Instead of searching for the report, you can simply select the report from the list that originally displays when you access the Select Payroll Reports list.)
  3. Select the reports you want to add, which the multi-value selector moves to the Selected Reports list. (Note: After you select a report, the system dims it.) In addition, you can do the following:
  1. Click Done. | Report Fee | Enter a fee to charge for the report, if any. To avoid printing a report for this client, even a standard report, enter -9.99. |
  2. Click Save.

Setting Conditions for Tipped Employees

Determine how the system handles certain conditions when processing payrolls for tipped employees in the Tipped Employees panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Adjust Taxes to Cover Cash Shortfall Indicate the tax adjustment process to use if there is a shortage of cash earnings.
Adjust Reported Tips to Minimum Wage Selected: When you select this field, reported tips will be adjusted (increased) to meet the minimum wage level. If the employee’s total earnings (cash + tips) do not meet or exceed the state’s minimum wage (not the cash minimum wage), the reported tips will be rounded up so the total earnings will equal minimum wage. Default (not selected): Reported tips will not be adjusted (increased) to meet the minimum wage level. If the employee’s total earnings (cash + tips) do not meet or exceed the state’s minimum wage (not the cash minimum wage), the reported tips will remain as they were entered and the TIP CREDIT MAKEUP pay code will calculate to ensure the total earnings equal minimum wage. For more information, please visit the article Reported Tips are higher than entered on the Customer Resource Center.
Allocated Tip Calc Percent Enter the percentage if the system should use an allocated tips calculation process, otherwise leave this field blank (for example, enter 8.00 for 8%).
Days Until Prenote Auto-Activate Enter the number of days after which the system activates prenoted accounts that were successfully processed through a payroll. (If set to zero (0), this value indicates no prenote process.) Note: You can use the Days Until Prenote Auto-Activate and Prenote On Next Pay Date fields to override the system-level parameters at the client level.
Prenote On Next Pay Date Select the option to run a test case of direct deposit information before an EFT occurs: - No: Runs the prenote on the current date and does not wait until the next pay date. - Next Pay Date: Runs the prenote on the next scheduled pay date for an employee. - Next Banking Day: Runs the prenote on the next banking day.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Using Client Payroll Processing Options

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Client Tax Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Tax.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Tax.htm

Setting Client Tax Parameters

Set tax parameters with the Tax tab on the Client Details form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Click the Tax tab.

Setting General Tax Parameters

Set tax information for the client in the Tax Parameters panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Federal Employer ID Number Enter the federal ID number. This is usually the Employer Identification Number (EIN), or some clients might use a Social Security Number.
Tax Geocode Override Option Optional: Select to indicate the Vertex GeoCode the system should use for tax calculations instead of the default. Options are: - –Select–: No override; the system uses the worksite location for the GeoCode (default setting). - Override Work GeoCode with Resident GeoCode: The system uses the employee’s resident GeoCode, defined in the Employee Details > Address tab (either GeoCode or Override GeoCode) instead of the worksite location’s GeoCode. Select this when employees work from home. - Override Work GeoCode with Home Location GeoCode: The system uses the employee’s “home” location assignment to supply the GeoCode for the location-based portion of taxes. This selection is not routinely used. - Override T/S GeoCode with Resident GeoCode: The system uses the employee’s resident GeoCode from the Employee Details > Address tab in place of the GeoCode on the time sheet.
  1. Click Save.

Setting State Tax Parameters

Set state tax parameters for each state where the client does business with the State Tax Setup panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
State Enter or select a two-character state code. States with or without suffixes will display in alphabetical order once any changes are saved.
State Unemployment Insurance ID Enter a state unemployment insurance ID for the selected state. Note: If you enabled the REKEY.TAXID global custom feature code on the System Parameters form, you must re-enter the ID in the prompt that displays. (Click Continue after re-entering the ID.)
Secondary SUI ID If this is a PEO company, enter a secondary ID for reporting a client’s wages in states such as Kansas and Missouri that use the employer’s rate but report it separately using this ID. Note: If you enabled the REKEY.TAXID global custom feature code on the System Parameters form, you must re-enter the ID in the prompt that displays. (Click Continue after re-entering the ID.)
State Tax ID Enter the state tax ID for the selected state. Note: If you enabled the REKEY.TAXID global custom feature code on the System Parameters form, you must re-enter the ID in the prompt that displays. (Click Continue after re-entering the ID.)
Client Reporting Start Date/End Date To override the dates for client tax reporting set for the state’s processing rules, enter a date range: - Enter the Client Reporting Start Date for SUTA tax reporting. - Enter the Client Reporting End Date for SUTA tax reporting.
  1. Click Save.

Updates to Form W-2 build

The State Income Tax Account Number on the employee Form W-2 will now be pulled from the Client Details form or the Employer Details form based on the tax deduction code, unless an override exists on the Employer Details form on the SIT Rpt Entity field for that state under the State Tax section.

The State Income Tax Account Number on the employee Form W-2 will be:

Note: If the State Tax ID is not available on the corresponding reporting entity, the Form W-2 will not be built, and an error will appear in the W2 Error Report stating State Employer ID not found for Client # for State XX OR State Employer ID not found for Employer for State XX

Selecting Taxes to Suppress

Select taxes to suppress for all the employees of a client with the Taxes to Suppress panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Tax Code Enter or select each Tax Code to suppress. The Tax Name displays.
Start Date/End Date Date range to suppress the tax code.
  1. Click Save.

Setting an Employer’s Optional State Taxes

Set the employer’s optional state taxes with the Employee SDI Tax Reclassification panel.

Note: Note: To set up New York SDI Tax information, see the Setting Up the New York SDI Tax task sheet in the Customer Resource Center for complete information.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Employee SDI Tax Code — Enter or select the code that indicates the employee-paid tax deduction code for which the client has its own insurance plan, but is withheld from the employee and possibly credited to the client. The description for the code displays in the column to the right.

Payroll Deduction Code — Enter or select the code that deducts the company-paid disability insurance. The description for the code displays in the column to the right.

  1. Click Save.

Redirecting Tax Codes

Redirect tax codes with the Tax Redirect Options panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Redirect From Tax Code — Enter or select the tax deduction code to redirect.

Redirect To Tax Code — Enter or select the employer tax deduction code. The “Redirect From” code will redirect to this one.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Setting Client Time Sheet Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_Time_Sheet.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_Time_Sheet.htm

Setting Client Time Sheet Parameters

You can set pay codes, deductions, and other parameters for the client using the Time Sheet tab.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Click the Time Sheet tab.

Setting Pay Codes

Set pay codes for time-related categories with the Summary Time Sheet Pay Codes panel.

Note: Note: To change existing pay code columns when there is a time sheet in process, see Adjusting Summary Time Sheet Columns.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Pay Code Enter up to ten pay codes to track in each column. > Note: Note: If a Default T/S Hours value is configured for any employee (see Establishing and Maintaining Employee Pay Information), that amount goes into the field set as the Default Hours Column, generally used for regular pay. If no column is selected, Pay Code 1 is used for default hours. The default pay code for auto time sheet hours must pay by hours.
Time Sheet - First Column Displays Set the unique identifier that the system displays in the Summary Time Sheet Entry form to distinguish the employee. Choose the option that helps your payroll processors distinguish employees with similar names. - Employee Identifier (Prism): This displays the employee’s PrismHR identifier (assigned when they were entered in the system). It also displays in Employee Details. - Social Security Number (Last four digits): The employee’s Social Security number displays according to the masking option set in System Parameters. If it is set to display the employee ID for active clients, then that displays instead. - Employee Number (non Prism): This option displays the employee number (set in the Employee Details Work tab).
  1. Click Save.

Note: For more information about setting pay codes, see the Importing More Than 20 Pay Codes Using Match Pay Import Method article in the Customer Resource Center.

Selecting Fields for Display

Select fields to display on the Detail Time Sheet Entry form using the Detail Time Entry Parameters panel.

Note: Note: If you hide the worksite location field, the system uses the employees’ primary location from Employee Details.

  1. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Detail Time Sheet Fields — Displayed fields include Location, Division, and Department. You cannot select both Shift and Mileage. If you change from one to the other, you must delete the existing line and add a new line.

Required — Indicates whether users are required to log data in the Time Sheet Entry form.

User Access — Indicates who (service provider or worksite manager) can view fields on the Time Sheet Entry form.

Hidden — Shows or hides the Detail Time Sheet Entry field.

  1. Click Save.

Excluding Items

Exclude items from the time sheet filter with the Filters to Suppress (Prism Core Only) table. For example, you can exclude filters that are not in use so they are not offered to the payroll processor as filter options.

  1. Click + and select a filter category to suppress. Repeat for each additional category.

  2. Click Save.

Selecting Import Definitions

Select the import definitions for importing the client’s time sheets with the Import Definitions panel.

  1. Enter a Definition ID for each time sheet import definition used.

  2. Click Save.

Specifying Templates

Specify the templates used by the client for temporary calculation overrides for individual employees with the Payroll Option Templates panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Template Select each template that applies to the client.
Show Template Click the icon in the Show Template column to see template settings. This opens a read-only version of the Payroll Option Templates form.
Template Display (Time Sheet) Select to indicate the availability of the Payroll Template column in the Summary Time Sheet Entry form. Options are: - Do not display: The column is hidden and users cannot access the column in the time sheet. - Service Provider: Service providers can see the template column using the filter options in the time sheet, Worksite manager and trusted advisor users cannot access the column. - Worksite Manager: Worksite managers and trusted advisors can see the template column using the filter options in the time sheet. Service providers cannot access the column. - All users: All users with access to the time sheet can use the filter options to see the column.
  1. Click Save.

Defining Standard Deductions

Set up to three standard deductions to show on the time sheet with the Time Sheet Deductions panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Deduction Code 1 Use for the first standard deduction.
Deduction Code 2 Use for the second standard deduction.
Deduction Code 3 Use for the third standard deduction.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Payroll Option Templates Overview

========================================================================

Defining W/C Accrual Modifiers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Client_WC_Accrual_Modifiers.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Client_WC_Accrual_Modifiers.htm

Defining W/C Accrual Modifiers

You can define how the system handles when the wages of the client’s employees are not sufficient to support a benefit deduction. In these cases, use the W/C Accrual Modifiers form to define workers’ compensation accrual modifiers that the client uses.

W/C accrual modifiers are required:

To set W/C Accrual Modifiers:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select W/C Accrual Modifiers. [Image: W/C Accrual Modifiers form]

  3. Fill in the required information in these fields.

Field Description
State Code Enter a two-character state code, or select it from the drop-down.
Effective Date Enter a date when the bill rate goes into effect, or select an existing date to edit.
Discount/Debit Enter the employer’s Discount/Debit for this state.
Modifier Enter the employer’s Modifier for this state.
Effective Rate The Effective Rate is calculated by multiplying the Discount/Debit by the Modifier.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Code Description Overrides

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Code_Description_Override.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Code_Description_Override.htm

Defining Code Description Overrides

Establish alternate descriptions, rather than global descriptions, for pay, deduction, tax, and benefit codes used by a client with the Code Description Overrides form.

To set codes:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Code Description Overrides.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Code Type — Select a code type: Pay, Deduction, Tax, Benefit.

Code — Enter the Code value to override. The Global Description displays.

Override Description — Enter an alternate, abbreviated Override Description for this code. This appears on the client’s pay stubs and certain reports.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Payroll Shipping Methods for the Client

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Company_Delivery_Methods.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Company_Delivery_Methods.htm

Defining Payroll Shipping Methods for the Client

Use the Special Delivery form to define methods that users can select for shipping the client’s payrolls. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To define payroll shipping methods for the client:

  1. Select All Locations if the delivery method applies to all locations. If this is selected, the system charges a single fee for the whole client.

  2. If you did not select All Locations, click New and select one of the client’s worksite locations, or enter the code for a location that already has a delivery method defined for it.

  3. Enter the Company Override Method, which is one of the delivery methods defined in your system. This overrides the default.

  4. Enter the Method description, which is usually the name for the service (for example, US Postal Service or FedEx).

  5. Enter the Days In Transit, which is the delivery method’s number of days in transit.

  6. Enter the Bill Event Code, which is the ID of the billing event that the system uses to track this delivery method. If there is no charge for the delivery method, leave this field blank.

  7. Enter the Special Bill Amt to override the standard billing amount for this client, if appropriate.

  8. Use the Method Active drop-down to indicate the status of this delivery method:

  1. In the Method Until field, enter the date when delivery method should stop being used for the client. After this date, the system sets the Method Active to No.

  2. Select Create Spec Sheet to indicate that a special sheet will print during payroll processing. Do not select this option if a special sheet is not necessary.

  3. If a special sheet will print:

a. Enter the Special Message that prints on the sheet.
b. Enter the Name that should appear on the sheet.
— —
c. Enter the Address to print on the sheet.
— —
d. Enter the City, State, Zip Code to print on the sheet.
— —
  1. Select the Delivery Sheet Format, which ensures that the address on the printed delivery sheet displays in the window envelopes your organization uses. You can select one of the following:

Note: If you select one of the 2 Window formats, you must enter the full address.

  1. Click Save.

After changing these settings, you can rerun the delivery sheet report from the Payroll Summary form, if needed.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Confirming Time Off Plan Settings

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Confirmation_Settings.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Confirmation_Settings.htm

Confirming Time Off Plan Settings

You can use the Confirmation form to review and then submit the saved plan details from steps 1 and 2 in each panel. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: If you need to make a change to the plan information, click

[Image: screenshot]

to return to the panels in the Set Up Plans form and make that update. Then proceed to the Confirmation form by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

.

Note: Note the following when working in the Confirmation form:

Use the buttons in the Confirmation form to do the following:

Click — Action

[Image: screenshot] — Opens a panel.

[Image: screenshot] — Collapses an open panel.

[Image: screenshot] — Collapses the panel details.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens each panel and displays their details.

[Image: screenshot] — Returns to the panel in the Set Up Plans form, where you can make updates.

[Image: screenshot] — Returns to the Set Up Plans form, where you can make changes to plan information.

[Image: screenshot] — Proceeds to the Confirmation form, if you returned to the Set Up Plans form to make a change.

[Image: screenshot] — Completes step 3 by committing the saved plan to the system.

[Image: screenshot] — Saves your information and returns to the Time Off Setup Workflow form.

Finishing the Plan Setup

To complete step 3, review the information in each panel and click Finish Setup to commit the saved plan to the system. A message displays:

[Image: screenshot]

Important! Clicking Finish Setup finalizes the time off plan information that you made in this workflow. If you need to make more updates, you must now make them in the legacy Time Off Work Center.

Click Yes to commit the saved plan to the system. A progress window displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Click Close to return to the Time Off Setup Workflow form.

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Maintaining Company Contacts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Contacts.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Contacts.htm

Maintaining Company Contacts

Use the Contacts form to maintain the contacts for a company.

To maintain contacts for a company:

  1. Go to the Contacts form by selecting the contact link on the Account tab in the Client Details form.

  2. In the Contacts form that displays, complete the following fields:

Field Name — Description

Contact ID — Select New to create a Contact ID for a new contact person. Enter or select the ID of an existing contact to edit the information, or select the contact from the table on the right.

Contact Type — Enter or select the Contact Type ID. The Contact Type displays. Note: You can enter or select multiple Contact Type IDs.

Name — Enter the Name of the contact person.

Title — Enter the contact’s Title.

Address — Enter the contact’s Address.

Zip — Enter the Zip code for the contact’s Address. The City and State automatically display for that address/zip code.

Work Phone — Enter the contact’s Work Phone number. Note: You can initiate a Zoom call to the client’s work phone number by clicking the Call ( [Image: screenshot] ) icon, if a supported soft phone exists on your computer.

Extension — Enter the contact’s telephone Extension.

Cell Phone — Enter the contact’s Cell Phone number. Note: You can initiate a Zoom call to the client’s cell phone number by clicking the Call ( [Image: screenshot] ) icon, if a supported soft phone exists on your computer.

Email Address — Enter the contact’s Email Address.

Comments — Enter any Comments related to the contact person.

  1. Click Save.

Related Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Setting Training Course Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Courses.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Courses.htm

Setting Training Course Codes

You can set training course codes and related information using the Courses form.

To set training course codes and related information, do the following:

  1. Go to the Courses form on the Client|Change menu and complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Course — Enter or select a code for the course.

Course Name — Enter the course name.

In House — Select if this is company-sponsored training.

Cost Per Student — Enter the cost per student. This generally only applies for courses with third-party vendors.

Offered By — Enter the name of the course provider.

Regularly Scheduled — Select if the course is offered on a regular basis.

Schedule — Enter a brief description of when the course is offered.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Voluntary Third Party Deductions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Cutback_Deductions.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Cutback_Deductions.htm

Defining Voluntary Third Party Deductions

Use the Third Party Deductions form to define voluntary third party deductions for a client and link them to a third party payee.

To define voluntary third party deductions, do the following:

  1. Enter each Third Party Deduction Code. The Deduction Code Description displays.

Note: Only use voluntary deductions that do not have a rebate bill code. If you select a voluntary deduction with an assigned rebate bill code an error message displays, “Third Party Deductions must have a Voluntary Deduction Type and have no Rebate Bill Code assigned. Check the deduction code settings or select an applicable code.” Click OK to continue.

  1. Enter the relevant Third Party Payee Code for each deduction.

  2. Click Save.

Note: Refer to the Payroll Setup Guide for information on creating standard deduction codes. See Maintaining Third Party Payees Vendor Information for information on creating third party payees.

========================================================================

Maintaining Departments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Departments.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Departments.htm

Maintaining Departments

Set the client department-related codes and benefits using the Departments form.

Establishing Department Codes

Set department codes with the Departments panel. Click Import to launch the Data Import Tool form, where you can upload a database file and import data. (This icon displays for all user roles except “Inquiry Only.”)

Note: Note: For more information about the Data Import Tool form, see the Payroll Administration Guide.

To set department codes:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Departments.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
Department Code Enter a new code or search for an existing code. For new codes, use a brief but descriptive term, such as a department name abbreviation (for example, OPER for Operations). Do not use special characters. For existing codes, click Department Code. Select an existing code or search for a code from the Department Codes with User Security form. Note: Codes that list Yes in the Obsolete column cannot be used.
Department Name Enter a descriptive department name.
Per Diem Percent Enter the percentage of pay that is allocated to non-taxable per diem when per diem is paid with the percentage method.
G/L Segment For additional department accounting options, enter the G/L Segment 1 or G/L Segment 2 code for building general ledger accounts. (See the PEO Client Company Accounting task sheet in the Customer Resource Center for more information.) - In G/L Segment 1, enter the code to use as the G/L account number segment instead of the department code. This replaces EEDP instead of the actual code. - The G/L Segment 2 also allows for more accounting options based on the department code. It is rarely used and it ties to the EEDP2 mnemonic in the G/L interfaces. For any miscellaneous employee department G/L codes (EEMDP01-EEMDP99) that can be used to complete an account number in the client’s accounting system: - Enter the Misc GL Description. For example, EEMDP01 = REG pay and EEMDP02 = O/T. - Enter the information that replaces the Misc GL Count code in the Misc GL Segment field.
  1. Click Save.

Working with Miscellaneous GL Segments

Use the Misc GL panel to review Misc GL Counts (predefined wildcards) for this department and enter replacement Misc GL Segments.

Note: During payroll processing, the system substitutes the GL segments for wildcards in GL account codes. These wildcards must also be included in the following setups:

When working with miscellaneous GL segments:

  1. The predefined wildcards display in rows in the Misc GL Count column, where the codes are always EEMDP01 through EEMDP99. (The program that evaluates the wildcards only looks for those values.)

  2. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Description. For example, EEMDP01 = Segment 1 and EEMDP02 = Segment 2. (You can apply these misc segments to account codes for other areas besides pay, such as taxes or deductions.)

Important! Any changes made to the descriptions affect all departments in the active client.

Note: The Misc GL Description column’s values are for reference only. (These descriptions are stored in the client’s record.) The system automatically loads these values each time a department record displays.

  1. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Segment value that replaces the Misc GL Count wildcard.

  2. Click Save.

Establishing Department Benefits

Set department benefits with the Eligible Benefits panel.

Note: The Eligible Benefits panel allows you to select one or more Benefit Plan IDs only if you have selected Departments Restrict Eligibility option in the Eligible Benefits Determinant field in the Benefits tab on the Client Details form. If you do not select this option, then you will not be able to select any Benefit Plan IDs. A conditional message, “Access to this section requires the Eligible Benefits Determinant to be set to Departments Restrict Eligibility on the Client Details form.” also displays in the Eligible Benefits panel.

To establish benefit plans for this department, do the following:

  1. In the Eligible Benefits panel, complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Benefit Plan ID — Each Benefit Plan ID for the benefits that employees in the departments are eligible. Enter the Benefit Plan ID or select Benefit Plan ID to display the Select Benefit Plans list.

Plan Description — A description of the Benefit Plan ID.

Import Eligible Benefits — A quick link to import eligible benefit plans. Select this quick link to display the Eligible Benefits import template in the Data Import Tool.

  1. Click Save.

Note: If the Eligible Benefits panel is disabled and there is any existing data in this panel, then on saving the form, a message, “Do you wish to clear the existing Benefit Plan IDs in the Eligible Benefits section? Y/N” displays.

Accessing Additional Information from the Actions Menu

You can access other information and settings using the Actions menu:

========================================================================

Maintaining Divisions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Divisions.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Divisions.htm

Maintaining Divisions

You can maintain division codes, related benefits, and ACH information for each division at the client level using the Divisions form.

Note: Click the Data Import Tool icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) to upload a database file and import data. (This icon displays for all user roles, except “Inquiry Only.”)

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: For more information about the Data Import Tool form, see the PrismHR Payroll Administration Guide.

Establishing Code Parameters

Set code parameters that represent a division in the Divisions panel.

To set code parameters:

  1. Select the Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Divisions.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field Name Description
Division Code Enter a new code or select to search for an existing code. For new codes, use a brief but descriptive term, such as a division name abbreviation (for example, EAST for Eastern Division). For existing codes, click Division Code. Select an existing code or search for a code from the Division Codes with User Security form. Note: Codes that display “Yes” in the Obsolete column cannot be used.
Division Name Enter a descriptive division name.
Transfer Account (Corporate edition only) Enter the inter-divisional transfer account.
Obsolete Select if this division code is no longer in use and no employees are assigned to it. Selecting this option also hides the division from most search screens, such as the lookup field in New Hire. If there are non-active (Terminated) employees allocated to the division on the client’s HR\ Change\ Employee Details form’s Work tab, PrismHR generates a warning message: “If any of the employees with this division code are ever reactivated, there could be payroll errors generated. Do you wish to continue?” Click Yes to proceed or click No to terminate this process.
G/L Segment Enter any segment codes used to build general ledger account numbers: - In G/L Segment 1, enter the code to use as an alternative to the Division Code. - In G/L Segment 2, enter the G/L code that should substitute for EEDV2 in G/L code routines. - In G/L Segment 3, enter a third G/L code, if needed.
  1. Click Save.

Working with Miscellaneous GL Segments

Use the Misc GL panel to review Misc GL Counts (predefined wildcards) for this division and enter replacement Misc GL Segments.

Note: During payroll processing, the system substitutes the GL segments for wildcards in GL account codes. These wildcards must also be included in the following setups:

When working with miscellaneous GL segments:

  1. The predefined wildcards display in rows in the Misc GL Count column, where the codes are always EEMDV01 through EEMDV99. (The program that evaluates the wildcards only looks for those values.)

  2. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Description. For example, EEMDV01 = Segment 1 and EEMDV02 = Segment 2. (You can apply these misc segments to account codes for other areas besides pay, such as taxes or deductions.)

Important! Any changes made to the descriptions affect all divisions in the active client.

Note: The Misc GL Description column’s values are for reference only. (These descriptions are stored in the client’s record.) The system automatically loads these values each time a division record displays.

  1. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Segment value that replaces the Misc GL Count wildcard.

  2. Click Save.

Establishing Division Benefits

Set division benefits with the Eligible Benefits panel.

Note: The Eligible Benefits panel allows you to select one or more Benefit Plan IDs only if you have selected Divisions Restrict Eligibility option in the Eligible Benefits Determinant field in the Benefits tab on the Client Details form. If you do not select this option, then you will not be able to select any Benefit Plan IDs. A conditional message, “Access to this section requires the Eligible Benefits Determinant to be set to Divisions Restrict Eligibility on the Client Details form.” also displays in the Eligible Benefits panel.

To establish benefit plans for this division, do the following:

  1. In the Eligible Benefits panel, complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Benefit Plan ID — Each Benefit Plan ID for the benefits that employees in the divisions are eligible. Enter the Benefit Plan ID or select Benefit Plan ID to display the Select Benefit Plans list.

Plan Description — A description of the Benefit Plan ID.

Import Eligible Benefits — A quick link to import eligible benefit plans. Select this quick link to display the Eligible Benefits import template in the Data Import Tool.

  1. Click Save.

Note: If the Eligible Benefits panel is disabled and there is any existing data in this panel, then on saving the form, a message, “Do you wish to clear the existing Benefit Plan IDs in the Eligible Benefits section? Y/N” displays.

Working with Miscellaneous GL Segments

Use the Misc GL panel to review Misc GL Counts (predefined wildcards) for this division and enter replacement Misc GL Segments.

Note: During payroll processing, the system substitutes the GL segments for wildcards in GL account codes. These wildcards must also be included in the following setups:

When working with miscellaneous GL segments:

  1. The predefined wildcards display in nine rows in the Misc GL Count column, where the codes are always EEMDV01 through EEMDV09. (The program that evaluates the wildcards only looks for those values.)

  2. The Misc GL Description column’s values are for reference only. (These descriptions are stored in the client’s record.) The system automatically loads these values each time a division record displays.

Important! Any changes made to the descriptions affect all divisions in the active client.

  1. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Segment value that replaces the Misc GL Count wildcard.

  2. Click Save.

Establishing Banking Information

Set banking information specific to this division with the Division ACH and ACH Details panels. These values override those defined in Client Details.

Note: For Reverse Wire clients, the ACH Details panel name changes to Reverse Wire Details.

To set banking information:

  1. Complete the following fields in these panels:

Field Name — Description

Payroll Check Account — Enter or select the account from which to draw payroll checks.

Direct Deposit Account — Enter or select the account from which to draw direct deposit transactions.

Garnishment Check Account — Enter or select the account from which to draw garnishment checks.

Reverse Wire Account — Enter or select the account from which to draw reverse wire checks. Note: The client must be set up with the Break Field set to Division and Create REAL Invoice Break enabled on the Billing tab in the Client Details form to invoice correctly by division.

Division’s ACH Status — Set a division’s ACH status. For example, Inactive.

ABA/Routing Number — Enter a nine-digit ABA/routing number for the division’s depository bank.

Account Number — Enter a division’s bank account number.

Account Type — Select the account type (checking or savings) from the drop-down.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Displaying Employee Statistics

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Employee_Statistics.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Employee_Statistics.htm

Displaying Employee Statistics

Display a data summary about the employees of a company with Employee Statistics.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select Employee Statistics from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] .

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Configuring the Company’s ESS Settings

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ESS_Configuration.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ESS_Configuration.htm

Configuring the Company’s ESS Settings

Configure Employee Portal (EP) settings with the ESS Configuration form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select ESS Configuration from the Actions menu.

Configuring ESS Settings

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Allow Terminated Employees Select if terminated employees need access to EP.
Company Folder Name Enter the directory where custom files for the client are stored.
Links Template Enter the template assigned to this client for the external links resource page.
Show 1099 Option Select to display the 1099 field in the New Hire form.
Display Viewed Checks Select to allow viewing checks in EP.
Always Require Email Select to require email addresses in the New Hire form.
Display PEO FSA Match Select to allow EP users to see flexible spending account match data.
Display Employer 401k Match Select to allow EP users to see 401(k) match data from the employer .
Display Employer Benefit Match Select to allow EP users to see benefit match data from the employer.
Display Future Checks Select to allow users to see upcoming checks.
  1. Click Save.

Configuring Web Services

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Web Service Code — Enter the list of codes that this client offers to their employees. For example, select EVERIFY to indicate that the client is E-Verify enabled (employees in that company can undergo E-Verify).

State — Enter each state postal code where a client offers the listed web services. Do not enter any states if the web services apply to all states where the client does business.

Worksite — Enter the locations where the client offers the listed web services. Do not enter any locations if the web services apply to all client worksite locations.

  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Using ESS Menu Builder

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ESS_Menu_Builder.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ESS_Menu_Builder.htm

Using ESS Menu Builder

Set up menus for EP with ESS Menu Builder. Select Use Default Menu Structure to use the default menu structure configured by the organization for a client’s EP. You cannot edit the ESS menus for a client.

If the default menu structure is not specified, future changes to the default menu will not update the client menu.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select ESS Menu Builder from the Actions menu.

  4. When you finish editing the menu, click Save and then click Close.

Using Menu Headers

Menu headers are the top-level menus seen by EP users.

To add a new header:

  1. Click New Menu Header. The Add a New Menu Structure window opens.

  2. Enter the label for the menu header in the Text field. This displays in EP on the menu tile.

  3. In the Tool-Tip Text field, enter the text that appears when a user hovers the mouse over the menu header.

  4. Enter the web URL of the main page for that menu in the Link field.

  5. To display an icon for that menu, enter the Image URL, which is the file path for the image. For example, img/flatimages/svg/tiles/myself.svg. See ESS Menu Tile Images for a list of available images and the associated file path.

  6. Click Save to return to the ESS Menu Builder form. The new header displays.

  7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 to create a new menu, or click Save.

To edit header text:

  1. Click the edit icon [Image: screenshot] in the header box. The Edit Menu Header window opens. The fields are the same as in the Add a New Menu Structure form.

  2. Edit the any of the items as needed.

  3. Click Save.

Using Menu Items

Drag items from the Available Menu Items list to the rectangle below the appropriate header.

  1. Click the name of a menu header to expand it.

  2. Click and hold the available menu item you want to add.

  3. Drag the item to the rectangle under the menu header.

  4. Release the mouse button. The menu item now appears in the menu structure.

  5. Rearrange the sub-menu items by dragging and dropping them within the list.

  6. Click Save.

[Image: screenshot]

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

ESS Menu Tile Images

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ESS_Menu_Tile_Images.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ESS_Menu_Tile_Images.htm

ESS Menu Tile Images

PrismHR ships with a set of images for use with top-level menus in Employee Portal (EP).

[Image: screenshot]

In the Menu Header editor, enter the Image URL as img/flatimages/svg/tiles/{imagefile}. For example, img/flatimages/svg/tiles/myself.svg.

Image Image File Image Image File
[Image: screenshot] 401k.svg [Image: screenshot] myself.svg
[Image: screenshot] onboarding.svg [Image: screenshot] envelope.svg
[Image: screenshot] enrollment.svg [Image: screenshot] documents.svg
[Image: screenshot] benefits.svg [Image: screenshot] password.svg
[Image: screenshot] heart_health.svg [Image: screenshot] password_change.svg
[Image: screenshot] benefits_summary.svg [Image: screenshot] payroll_inquiry_1.svg
[Image: screenshot] fsa.svg [Image: screenshot] piggy_bank.svg
[Image: screenshot] direct_deposit_auth.svg [Image: screenshot] ESS_UI_1.22.15-11.svg
[Image: screenshot] direct_deposit.svg [Image: screenshot] pto_pending.svg
[Image: screenshot] check_history_1.svg [Image: screenshot] pto.svg
[Image: screenshot] direct_deposit_1.svg [Image: screenshot] time.svg
[Image: screenshot] eew4.svg [Image: screenshot] counter_clock.svg
[Image: screenshot] payroll.svg [Image: screenshot] turning_page.svg
[Image: screenshot] payroll_inquiry.svg [Image: screenshot] w2.svg
[Image: screenshot] ESS_UI_1.22.15-24.svg [Image: screenshot] early_w2_election.svg
[Image: screenshot] help.svg

========================================================================

Using ESS Theme Designer

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/ESS_Theme_Designer.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/ESS_Theme_Designer.htm

Using ESS Theme Designer

Use the ESS Theme Designer to customize the appearance of Employee Portal (EP) for the company. You can also use the organization’s theme by clicking Load Default Theme.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.
  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.
  3. Select ESS Theme Designer from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] .

Set a theme as follows:

  1. Specify colors for these items: text and tiles, title bars, header bars, breadcrumb bar, and the background. Use a hexademical color code, or click the drop icon [Image: screenshot] to select a palette color. The last column displays a color swatch.

  2. Upload a company logo to display in EP.

a. Click Choose File for the Logo Image.
b. Navigate to the location of the logo image file and select it.
— —
c. Click Open. You return to the ESS Theme Designer.
— —
d. Click Upload.
— —
  1. You can also upload a background image to display in EP.
a. Click Choose File for the Background Image.
b. Navigate to the location of the background image file and select it.
— —
c. Click Open. You return to the ESS Theme Designer.
— —
d. Click Upload.
— —
  1. Click Save Theme.

Note: Note: To remove a logo or background image from a theme, click the Delete button next to the image, then click Save Theme.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Establishing Codes for Event Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Events.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Events.htm

Establishing Codes for Event Types

You can establish codes for the types of events held by the client using the Events form.

To establish codes for the client’s event types, do the following:

  1. Go to the Events form on the Client|Change menu and complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Event — Enter or select an Event code that represents a type of client event. When creating a new code, use something brief but descriptive, for example, TR.

Event Classification — Enter an Event Classification that describes the type of event, for example, Training.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Adjusting FUTA Credit Amounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/FUTA%20Credit%20Adjustment%20Entry.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/FUTA Credit Adjustment Entry.htm

Adjusting FUTA Credit Amounts

Use the FUTA Credit Adjustment Entry form to appropriately adjust FUTA credit amounts to adjust FUTA Credit in the RTS without using tax adjustments for a client. The values within the RTS will reflect the adjustments made in this form. The FUTA Credit Adjustment Entry form will only accept employee IDs for the selected Client as this is a Client based form.

Note: Note:

To access the form, click Client. Under Client|Change, click FUTA Credit Adjustment Entry.

To enter FUTA Credit Adjustment:

  1. Complete the following:

Field Name — Description

Reporting Year — Select the year for which you want FUTA credit adjustment. By default the current year displays.

Employee ID — Enter the employee IDs for the client for whom you want to adjust FUTA credit or click the Employee ID and select them from the Select Employee dialog box. > Note: Note: Only employee for the selected client will appear in the dialog box. If you are manually entering employee IDs, you can only enter employee IDs for the selected client.

Employee Name — This field will auto-populate based on the selection above.

Year — This field will auto-populate based on the reporting year selected above.

State Tax Code — Enter the state tax code for example enter 05-17 for the state of California.

State — This field will auto-populate based on the selection above.

Wage Adjustment Amount — Enter numeric values only for tax adjustment amount as positive or negative to offset the FUTA Credit reduction amount within the FUTA Credit Register Build.

  1. Click Save to save the record. Adjustments to the xx-17 record will be saved and stored in the FUTA Credit Adjustment Entry grid for each employee.

  2. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

========================================================================

Defining Hazardous Materials

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Hazardous_Materials.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Hazardous_Materials.htm

Defining Hazardous Materials

You can specify hazardous material information used by a company with the Hazardous Materials form.

To define hazardous materials, do the following:

  1. Go to the Hazardous Materials form on the Client|Change menu and complete the following fields:
Field Description
Material Code Enter or select the hazardous material code.
Material Name Enter the name of the material, which is found on the product label.
Manufacturer Enter the product’s manufacturer name.
Emergency Phone Enter a phone number to call if there is a hazardous material emergency.
SDS On File Select if there is a Safety Data Sheet on file.
Date Prepared Enter the date the Safety Data Sheet was prepared for this material.
SDS Location Enter the physical location of the Safety Data Sheet.
Course Code/Retake Days For each course that instructs employees in hazardous material handling: - Enter a code for each safety course that employees must take before handling this hazardous material. - If the course must be completed periodically, enter the number of days between completion.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Labor Union Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Labor_Unions.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Labor_Unions.htm

Maintaining Labor Union Information

Set up union codes, dues, fringe benefits, and union addresses with the Labor Unions form. You can allow assignment of union dues table rules to a unique union deduction code. When using Position Union overrides, you can apply multiple union deduction codes to an employee based on the timesheet sensitive position code entered and allocate deductions amounts appropriately. When using position based Union code overrides, you can differentiate between the union deductions without requiring the union applied to the employee directly.

Set Labor Union Code Parameters

Set up code parameters with the Labor Unions panel.

To set labor union code parameters:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Labor Unions.

  3. In the Labor Unions panel, complete these fields.

Field Name Description
Union Code Enter a new union code or select an existing code by clicking the Union Code link.
Union Name Enter the name of the union.
Union Bill Template Select a template for employees that belong to this union. For default bundled clients, this changes the billing amounts.
Union Deduction Code This table has the following columns: - Union Deduction Code: Enter a deduction code for reporting or click the Union Deduction Code hyperlink and select it from the Deduction Codes dialogue box. - Union Deduction Description: A description of the union deduction code displays here after a union deduction code is entered above. - Union Dues Table Rules: You can now have unique union deduction codes with the calculation of union dues table to differentiate between various union deductions allowing unique deductions for better visibility to clients and employees. - For a Union Deduction Code that does not have Union Dues Table set as the Calculation Method for that union deduction code on the Deduction Codes form, you will see the [Image: screenshot] icon. If you click the [Image: screenshot] icon, you will get an error message stating The deduction code has an invalid calculation method. The code must have a calculation method of Union Dues Table to be assigned union dues table rules. - For a Union Deduction Code that has Union Dues Table set as the Calculation Method for that union deduction code on the Deduction Codes form, you will see the [Image: screenshot] icon. When you click it, a new form named Included Union Dues Table Rules will open. This form allows you to associate specific Union Dues Table Rules with a specific Union Deduction Code. - On the Included Union Dues Table Rules form, you can: - Add any Union Dues Table Rules from the drop-down for the selected Union Deduction Code provided it is listed in the Union Dues Table below on the Labor Unions form. Click Accept to close the form. Click the Save button on the Labor Unions form to file the changes. - Delete any Union Dues Table Rules from the drop-down for the selected Union Deduction Code. Click Accept to close the form. Click the Save button on the Labor Unions form to file the changes. - If from the Included Union Dues Table Rules drop-down you are trying to select a rule that is not included in the Union Dues Table, you will get an error message stating Not allowed, this Rule and Rate is not included in the Union Dues Table. Click OK to acknowledge the error and redo your selection. - Periods: This refers to the deduction period which references the week of the month for the payroll. For instance, if your weekly Pay Date was 02-28-2025 which was a Friday and 02-28-2025 was the 4th Friday of February, so Deduction Period will be 4. The Periods column indicates this Deduction Period for the corresponding Union Deduction Code. - This column cannot be empty for any given Union Deduction Code. If you try to delete the Periods column for any Union Deduction Code and save the Labor Unions form, you will receive an error stating The Union period(s) must be specified. - The default value is 12345. You can edit appropriately for the corresponding Union Deduction Code. So if there is a union deduction override on the Labor Unions form that would apply to the employee’s recurring deduction record, then just removing the GLOBAL custom feature code UNIONDEDPERIOD on the Systems Parameters form will not reset it to the default value of 12345. Any employee that already has a recurring deduction record that is updated for a certain period will remain in place. Before removing the GLOBAL custom feature code UNIONDEDPERIOD on the Systems Parameters form, you need to update the labor union record itself if you intend to go back to all periods. So please ensure the labor Union deduction periods are accurate before removing the custom feature code. - You can enter multiple deduction periods once between 1-5 or O. O indicates a one-time deduction for the month. - You cannot enter the same deduction period twice for the same Union Deduction Code. If you try to enter the same deduction period twice for any Union Deduction Code and save the Labor Unions form, you will receive an error stating A period can only be entered once. Note: The GLOBAL custom feature code UNIONDEDPERIOD must be turned on for this field to display and being editable. If the GLOBAL custom feature code UNIONDEDPERIOD is turned off the Periods column will still display, but you cannot edit it.

Set up union dues with the Union Dues Table panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field Name — Description

Rule — Select a rule to calculate union dues. For example, Fixed Amount charges the same amount for each pay period.

Rate/Perc — Optional: Enter a rate/percentage to calculate dues if either the Percentage of Wages or Rate x Hours Worked rule was selected.

Rate Group — Enter a rate group if the rule line should be grouped with others for performing calculations. Any Cap or Min/Max should point to this grouping code.

Rate Ge — If the rule applies to rates between two points, enter that level in the Rate Ge (greater than or equal to) field.

Rate Le — If the rule applies to rates that are less than or equal to a certain amount, enter the amount in the Rate Le field.

Rule Start — Enter the rule start date. Leave this blank to put the rule into effect immediately.

Rule End — Enter the rule end date, if any. Leave this blank if the rule never expires.

Pay Codes Included — To specify the pay codes that are subject to this rule, click the Edit icon [Image: screenshot] in Pay Codes Included; see Including Pay Codes Maintenance for Labor Unions. If you add a rule on the Union Dues Table which does not use pay codes, you will get the [Image: screenshot] icon for that rule under the Pay Codes Included column. When you click the [Image: screenshot] icon, you will get an error message stating This rule does not use pay codes.

Pay Codes Excluded — To specify the pay codes that are not subject to this rule, click the Edit icon [Image: screenshot] in Pay Codes Excluded; see Excluding Pay Codes Maintenance for Labor Unions. If you add a rule on the Union Dues Table which does not use pay codes, you will get the [Image: screenshot] icon for that rule under the Pay Codes Excluded column also. When you click the [Image: screenshot] icon, you will get an error message stating This rule does not use pay codes.

From the Union Dues Table on the Labor Unions form, you cannot delete a rule if it is associated with a Union Deductions Code on the Labor Unions form. After deleting, when you click Save on the Labor Unions form, you will get an error message stating This rule is assigned to Union Deduction Code, and must be removed prior to removing from the Union Dues Table. You must delete the Union Deductions Code first to be able to delete any associate rule from the Union Dues Table on the Labor Unions form.

OR

Using the Included Union Dues Table Rules form noted above, if you remove the rule assigned to any Union Deduction Code on the Labor Unions form for the Union Code, you can remove the rule from the Union Dues Table.

Maintaining Union Benefits

Set up union benefits in the Fringe Benefits panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field Name Description
Pay Code Select a code to pay a fringe benefit. Note: An error message displays if you enter an invalid pay code, “The pay code has an invalid calculation method. Please see the in product help for valid calculation methods for this process.” To prevent this error, only select one of the following calculation methods when applying the pay code: - NRE: % of Gross Earnings - NRH: Rate X Hours Worked - NRHFW: Rate X Full Hours Worked - NRHP: Rate X Hours Paid - NRHPS: Rate X Hours Paid (selected codes) - NRHSW: Rate X Straight Hours Worked

Set address and contact information with the Union Address panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field Name Description
Address Line 1 and 2 Enter an address for the union, using two lines if required.
City Enter the city where the union is located.
State Enter the state where the union is located.
Zip Code Enter the zip code for the location of the union.
Phone Enter a phone number, as well any extensions or directives.
Contact Enter a contact name for the union.
  1. Click Save to save changes to the record.

  2. Click Delete to delete a record.

  3. Click Cancel to clear the form.

========================================================================

Excluding Pay Codes Maintenance for Labor Unions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Labor_Unions_Excl_Pay_Codes_Maint.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Labor_Unions_Excl_Pay_Codes_Maint.htm

Excluding Pay Codes Maintenance for Labor Unions

  1. Set up pay codes that do not apply to rules listed in the Union Dues Table. Click Edit [Image: screenshot] in the Pay Codes Excluded field.

  2. Select each of the Excluded Pay Codes that are not subject to the rule.

  3. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Labor Union Information

========================================================================

Including Pay Codes Maintenance for Labor Unions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Labor_Unions_Incl_Pay_Codes_Maint.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Labor_Unions_Incl_Pay_Codes_Maint.htm

Including Pay Codes Maintenance for Labor Unions

  1. Set up pay codes that apply to rules listed in the Union Dues Table. Click Edit [Image: screenshot] in the Pay Codes Included field.

  2. Select each of the Included Pay Codes that are subject to the rule.

  3. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Labor Union Information

========================================================================

Limiting W/C Classes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Limiting_WC_Classes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Limiting_WC_Classes.htm

Limiting W/C Classes

Use the Authorized W/C Classes form to limit the workers’ compensation classes available for the client to use. If no classes are entered for the client, all classes in the system are available.

[Image: Authorized W/C classes form]

Note: The Client ID is the unique identifier for the client.

To limit W/C classes for the client, do the following:

  1. For each workers’ compensation class that you want to make available to the client:
a. Enter the W/C Code. The Description displays.
b. Enter the Obsolete Date for the W/C code, if any.
— —
  1. Click Accept.

========================================================================

Setting Up Manager Users

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Manager_User_Setup.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Manager_User_Setup.htm

Setting Up Manager Users

You can use the Manager User Setup form to set up other worksite managers within their organization, who will be accessed in this form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

To set up worksite manager users:

  1. Perform the following setups:
  1. — On the Client Security form select User Roles and Human Resources Roles that will be allowed for the current client. (These will be the only roles that are available on the Manager User Setup form for worksite managers to assign to worksite managers they are creating.)
b. On the Users form, enable the Manager User Setup Human Resources Role.
2. Go to the Manager User Setup form on the Client Change menu.
  1. Do one of the following:
  1. — Select the User ID of an existing worksite manager or worksite employee to setup as a worksite manager user. The form populates the user’s information.

  2. — Enter a newUser ID, which automatically sets the User Type to Worksite Manager. (Continue entering information pertaining to the new user.)

Note: Note the following:

  1. Select Requires New Password to set a new password for an existing user or for a new user.

  2. Select an MFA option in the sMFA Device Expiration field.

  3. Define the User Role ID and the Human Resources Role to indicate which roles the worksite manager user is allowed to access.

Note: You must assign at least one user role to save the record.

  1. Select Add Client to define the Data Security entities for the client. The entities display in the Data Entity Security panel.

Note: Only the clients where you have access display. If you have access to multiple clients, you must select Add Company to manage the list of clients. (You must have access to at least one client to save the record.) Also, you can delete a client by selecting the icon in the Delete column.

  1. Do the following in the Data Entity Security panel:
  1. — Select an option in the Security by field to configure a user’s Data Security access hierarchy, so you can easily manage which employees the user can access:
  1. — Select an entity to change the access. For example, if Full Access displays, selecting it changes the access to No Access.
  1. Click Save.

Using the Actions Menu Options

The Manager User Setup form provides additional options on the Actions menu:

========================================================================

Maintaining Mileage Rates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Mileage_Rates.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Mileage_Rates.htm

Maintaining Mileage Rates

Set mileage codes and rates used in daily allowance of vehicle mileage calculations with the Mileage Rates form.

To set mileage rates:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Mileage Rates.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Mileage Code — Enter a mileage code.

Description — Enter a mileage rate description.

Mileage Rate — Enter the mileage rate, which is the gross amount paid per mile

Per Diem Rate — Enter the per diem rate, which is the portion of the total rate that makes up the non-taxable daily allowance.

Taxable Rate — The Taxable Rate is the difference between the mileage and per diem rates.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Overriding Global Required New Hire and Employee Dependent Fields

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/New_Hire_Optional_Fields_Maint.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/New_Hire_Optional_Fields_Maint.htm

Overriding Global Required New Hire and Employee Dependent Fields

Based on the needs of the client, you can indicate which fields on the New Hire and Employee Dependents forms are required, if any, by using the New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides form. The settings you configure here override the settings configured on the New Hire and Dependent Required Fields (Global) form for the specific client.

Note: Note: The New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides form indicates whether the client uses global settings exclusively or uses custom settings (which may be a mixture of overrides and global settings) by displaying a message at the top of the New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides form above the New Hires table. Additionally, the Global Setting column displays the global settings defined on the New Hire and Dependent Required Fields (Global) form (for reference only) as shown in the example below.

[Image: screenshot]

To indicate required fields for the New Hire and Employee Dependents forms at the client level:

  1. Go to the New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides form on the Client|Action menu.

  2. For each of the New Hires fields, indicate whether it is mandatory:

  1. For each of the Dependents fields, indicate whether it is mandatory:
  1. Click Save.

Note: Clicking Cancel while editing this form reverts the form to the state it was initially in when you first accessed the form (if you have performed no Save actions) OR reverts the form to the state it was in after the most recent Save action (so that only unsaved changes are removed).

========================================================================

Defining Pay Grades

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Pay_Grades.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Pay_Grades.htm

Defining Pay Grades

Pay grades are a type of earning or payroll disbursement. Set pay range information for a pay grade with the Pay Grades form.

To set pay grades:

  1. Click Client.

  2. From Client|Change select Pay Grades.

  3. Fill in these fields as required:

Field — Description

Pay Grade — Enter a pay grade code. Use something brief but descriptive, such as REG for Regular or OT for overtime.

Description — Enter a pay grade description.

Minimum Annual — Enter a minimum annual pay amount.

Maximum Annual — Enter a maximum annual pay amount.

  1. PrismHR calculates the other values:

Formula=(((Maximum – Minimum) / 2) + Minimum)

Formula= (((Maximum - Minimum) / Minimum) * 100)

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Payroll Accounting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Payroll_Accounting.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Payroll_Accounting.htm

Payroll Accounting

Use the Payroll Accounting panel in ASO Global G/L Account Setup to maintain ASO client accounting for pay codes.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. To set the accounts for all pay codes:
  1. — Enter the Debit Account to debit with any amount paid for all pay codes. The account name displays.

  2. — Enter the Overtime Debit Account to debit with any overtime amount (premium portion only) for all pay codes. The account name displays.

  1. If any pay codes should post to different accounts:
a. Enter each Except Pay Code. The Pay Code Description displays.
  1. — Enter the Debit Account to debit with any amount paid for the pay code. The Account Name displays.

  2. — Enter the Overtime Debit Account to debit with any overtime amount (premium portion only) for each pay code. The Account Name displays.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

Working with PEO Client Accounting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PEO_Client_Accounting_Setup.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PEO_Client_Accounting_Setup.htm

Working with PEO Client Accounting

You can define the accounts that PrismHR uses to build the client accounting download file and the report that breaks out invoice numbers using the client’s own account numbers. To do this, enable the settings on the PEO Client Accounting form using the following instructions.

Note: Note: If you are building onto a global template, enter only differences or additions. The system uses the data from the global template for any field you leave blank. See Setting Up PEO Client Accounting for general information about the PEO Client Accounting process.

Establishing the General Ledger Chart of Accounts

Use the PEO Client Accounting panel to establish the general ledger Chart of Accounts and various accounting system parameters used for this client. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To establish the general ledger Chart of Accounts:

  1. Go to the PEO Client Accounting form and complete the following fields:
Field Description
Account Template Enter the client’s Account Template ID.
Client Accounting System Select the Client Accounting System type.
QuickBooks Billing Template If you have been instructed to do so by the PrismHR Customer Support Team, enter the QuickBooks Billing Template used for billing export. The QuickBooks Billing Template field is for Quick Book Extracts custom logic implementation. The system uses this instead of the Accounting Template. Use this field.
Global Account Template Enter the Global Account Template used for this client.
Name of Output File Enter the Name of Output File to specify the name of the file that the system creates for the client accounting download, if any. If you define an output file, PrismHR creates the file automatically during payroll processing and users can download it from the Payroll Reports form or the Payroll Summary form. Note: Do not use the following invalid characters when naming the output file: “*/:<>?\ . Instead, you can use uppercase A-Z, lowercase a-z, and a space.
Company Offset Account Enter the Company Offset Account number used to handle the accounting offset for this client.
Exclude Non-Cash Pay Codes from Tax Allocation Base Select to exclude non-cash fringe benefit pay codes from the tax allocation base. For example, $0 allocation lines are not included.
Earn Code/Earn Account Format For each pay code that should use a different format: a. — Enter a pay code in the Earn Code field to build an accounting format. You can also enter an asterisk (*), which indicates “all remaining” pay codes. The asterisk must be the last item on the list, if used; the system ignores all items listed after the asterisk row. b. — Enter the Earn Account Format. This overrides any format defined in the template and the common format.
a. Enter a pay code in the Earn Code field to build an accounting format. You can also enter an asterisk (*), which indicates “all remaining” pay codes. The asterisk must be the last item on the list, if used; the system ignores all items listed after the asterisk row.
b. Enter the Earn Account Format. This overrides any format defined in the template and the common format.
Tax Code/Tax Account Format For each tax account that should use a different format: a. — Enter the Vertex Tax Code to create client accounting. You can also enter an asterisk (*), which indicates “all remaining” tax codes. The asterisk must be the last item on the list, if used; the system ignores all items listed after the asterisk row. Enter the full code or the tax identifier, which is the part after the dash. The state/county/local segments of the number precedes the dash. The first two numbers after the dash indicate the kind of tax. Refer to your documentation or voucher data to determine what codes to use. The Select Tax Code form displays when you click this field, where you can select from a list of available tax deduction codes. This form displays the tax code’s description and employer paid tax deduction. b. — Enter the Tax Account Format. This overrides any format defined in the template and the common format.
a. Enter the Vertex Tax Code to create client accounting. You can also enter an asterisk (*), which indicates “all remaining” tax codes. The asterisk must be the last item on the list, if used; the system ignores all items listed after the asterisk row.
b. Enter the Tax Account Format. This overrides any format defined in the template and the common format.
Deduction Code/Deduction Account Format For each deduction code that should use a different format: a. — Enter a Deduction Code to build an accounting format. You can also enter an asterisk (*), which indicates “all remaining” deduction codes. The asterisk must be the last item on the list, if used; the system ignores all items listed after the asterisk row. > Note: Note the following when working with deduction codes: - When searching for codes using the Deduction Codes search form, only those codes set with a rebate bill code in the **System\ Change\ Deduction Codes** form display. (The search form displays the code’s rebate bill code in the Bill Code column.) - If you enter a deduction code that is not set with a rebate bill code, an error message displays, “Only Deduction Codes with Rebate Bill Codes can be used here.” b. — Enter the Deduction Account Format. This overrides any format defined in the template and the common format.
a. Enter a Deduction Code to build an accounting format. You can also enter an asterisk (*), which indicates “all remaining” deduction codes. The asterisk must be the last item on the list, if used; the system ignores all items listed after the asterisk row.
  1. Click Save.

Establishing Accounting System Parameters

Use the Non-Bill Accounting panel, if you need to establish any accounting system parameters used for this company in PrismHR.

Note: This panel displays only if you select the Use Non-Bill Accounting option.

[Image: screenshot]

To establish any accounting system parameters:

  1. In the Non-Bill Accounting panel, complete the following fields:
Field Description
EE Deduction Code/EE Deduction Amount/EE Deduction Account Offset For each employee deduction code: a. — Enter the EE Deduction Code to override the format defined in the template. The Description displays. > Note: Note the following when working with EE deduction codes: - When searching for codes using the EE Deduction Codes search form, only those codes that are not set with a rebate bill code display. (No values display in the search form’s Bill Code column.) - If you enter a deduction code that is set with a rebate bill code, an error message displays, “Only Deduction Codes that do not have a Rebate Bill Code in place can be used here.” \ b. \ Enter the EE Deduction Account number format for this client. \ \ — \ — \ \ c. \ Enter the for the EE Deduction Account Offset number format. \ \ — \ — \
a. Enter the EE Deduction Code to override the format defined in the template. The Description displays.
  1. Click Save.

Defining the Custom Layout

If you selected Custom as the Client Accounting System, the Custom Layout panel displays.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. In the Custom Layout panel, complete the following fields:
Field Description
Cust Column Enter the Cust Column number where the data is entered. If you enter the same column number in multiple rows, the system concatenates the data.
Cust Heading In the Cust Heading, enter the heading to display in the first row.
Data Click Data to display the Lookup Items panel, where you can select a preset code to display in the spreadsheet. (Only the preset code displays in the spreadsheet, not the description.) You can also enter data in this field instead of selecting an item from the Lookup Items list. > Note: Note the following: - If there are multiple Pay Period End Dates for a payroll, the PPENDDATE preset code displays the earliest Pay Period End Date for that payroll. - Zeroes (0) display for DBAMOUNT and CRAMOUNT to indicate blank amounts.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topic

Setting Up PEO Client Accounting

Using Billing Codes

========================================================================

Using PEO Client Accounting Wildcards

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PEO_Client_Accounting_Wildcards.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PEO_Client_Accounting_Wildcards.htm

Using PEO Client Accounting Wildcards

Since you use the accounts set up in PEO Client Accounting Setup as a global template for all clients, fill in the specified Code and Account Format fields. PrismHR uses the four Common {type} Earn Account entry boxes to associate a general ledger account number with a PrismHR code.

Your use of a delimiter (such as a period, asterisk, or dash) in the Common {type} Earn Account fields depends on your client’s preference or accounting package. If there is a wildcard substitution indicated, but the code’s G/L code segment is blank, the system uses the actual code instead.

You can use the following wildcards in the Common {type} Earn Account fields:

Wildcard Description
CLBROKER Client Broker*
CLCC Client Cost Center
CLGRPCD Client Group Code*
CLID Client ID*
CLNAISC Client NAISC*
CLSALES Client Sales Person*
CLSCC Client Sub Cost Center
CLSTATE Client State*
CLSVRT Client Service Type*
CLWC Client WC Policy*
EEDP Employee Department
EEDP2 Employee Department Two
EEDV Employee Division
EEDV2 Employee Division Two
EEDV3 Employee Division Three
EEJB Employee Position
EEJB2 Employee Position Two
EEJB3 Employee Position Three
EELCC Employee Location Code
EELC Employee Location
EELC2 Employee Location Two
EELC3 Employee Location Three
EEPR Employee Project
EESCC Employee Sub Cost Center
EMCC Employer Cost Center
EMID Employer ID*
EMSCC Employer Sub Cost Center
MSCL01 - MSCL99 Client Miscellaneous GL Codes 01-99
EEMDP01 - EEMDP99 Employee Department Miscellaneous GL Codes 01-99
EEMDV01 - EEMDV99 Employee Division Miscellaneous GL Codes 01-99
EEMJB01 - EEMJB99 Employee Position Miscellaneous GL Codes 01-99
EEMLPJ01 - EEMLPJ99 Employee Project Miscellaneous GL Codes 01-99
EEMLC01 - EEMLC99 Employee Worksite Location Miscellaneous GL Codes 01-99

Note: Note that the following information only applies to the wildcards indicated above with an asterisk (*) in its Description column:

Parent Topic

Working with PEO Client Accounting

========================================================================

Defining Positions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Positions.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Positions.htm

Defining Positions

You can define position-related information for the client using the Positions form.

To access this form:

  1. Click Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Positions.

Click the Import button

[Image: screenshot]

to display the Data Import Tool form, which allows you to import a Position Codes template file that contains the following fields (this file must be in .txt format):

Note: Note the following:

Defining Position Information and Requirements

You can define basic position information and requirements using the Positions panel.

Note: Note: If the position exists in several departments, use a job code that easily identifies the department in which the position is assigned.

Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Position Code — Enter or select a unique code that briefly describes the position. For example, OPER for vehicle operator. (Codes cannot contain spaces or special characters.) If you select this field, a selector form displays where you can search for a specific position code, title, or classification or select a code from the list that displays. When this form opens, the position code, its title, classification, FLSA exempt status, and obsolete status display. To filter the search further by displaying only obsolete codes, select Yes in the Obsolete field (the default is No). To refresh the list, select Reset Search and Filters.

Position Title — Enter an official title. For example, General Manager.

Position Classification — Enter the position classification. The system displays the FLSA Exempt settings, EEO position group, and the EEO class, if they apply to this position. FLSA Exempt indicates whether the selected position classification is set to be exempt from both the minimum wage and overtime provisions of the FLSA. You cannot change it here.

Remote Position Classification — Enter an alternative position classification for remote employees of the same position. The system displays the FLSA Exempt settings, EEO position group, and the EEO class, if they apply to this remote position. FLSA Exempt indicates whether the selected remote position classification is set to be exempt from both the minimum wage and overtime provisions of the FLSA. You cannot change it here.

Position Description — Enter a description for this position.

The second panel defines requirements for the position and the pay.

Supervisory — Select if this is a supervisory position. The system uses this field for statistical reports.

Hierarchy Tier — For future development. Does not currently impact the functionality of PrismHR.

Pay Grade — Select to use as a default for new hires assigned this job code, if applicable. The Special Requirements option identifies those positions that have physical or mental requirements. The Americans with Disabilities Act prohibits employers from discriminating against qualified individuals with disabilities. Not including a particular person in the applicant pool for a certain job is only nondiscriminatory if that person does not meet any physical or mental requirements identified as essential functions of the position. Applications for these jobs must be closely monitored for ADA compliance.

Special Requirements — Select if this position requires any special physical or mental requirements.

Probation Days — Optional: Enter the number of days from hire that a new employee is on probation.

Sales Position — Select if this is a sales position.

Tipped Position — Select if this is for a position that receives tips.

D.O.T. Requirements — Select if this job code has special requirements as set forth by the U.S. Department of Transportation. The G/L Segment Code can be used as an alternative to this position when using G/L Accounting. See the PEO Client Company Accounting Task Sheet on the Customer Resource Center for more information.

G/L Segment Code — If applicable, enter the G/L Segment Code 1, G/L Segment Code 2, or G/L Segment Code 3 to use as the general ledger account number segment(s) in place of the Position Code. These are defined in PEO client accounting wild cards as EEJB, EEJB2, and EEJB3.

Defining Codes and Other Pay Information

You can define codes and other pay information for the position in this panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
Union Code Override Select this override for table-based union calculations. If an override is not selected, the system uses a union code in Employee Details, if any.
PR Chauffeur Tax Applies Select if this position is subject to Puerto Rico chauffeur’s tax and the primary work location is Puerto Rico.
Indirectly Tipped Select if this a tipped position that receives tips indirectly. For example, a busboy, cook, or service bartender.
Alaska Position Code If applicable, enter the Alaska Position Code sent to MasterTax for quarterly tax reporting to the state of Alaska.
SOC Code Enter the Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) Code, if appropriate. Enter only numbers, no dashes. This information is included in the MasterTax RTS file and the Employer and Client LA quarterly files in place of the position’s description. If you do not define a SOC code for the position, the files include the description.
TTO Code Define which positions are considered eligible tipped positions to comply with the tips requirements of the One Big Beautiful Bill Act. You can enter the TTO Code (Tipped Taxable Occupation Code) manually or you can click the TTO Code hyperlink and select it from the TTO Codes dialog box. The TTO Description displays upon entering a valid TTO Code. The system will validate when you enter a TTO Code against the SOC Code during the creation or updation of a Position. - Invalid TTO/SOC combinations result in an error message: TTO code [] and SOC code [] are not related. - Invalid TTO code results in an error message: TTO Code [] does not exist. - Invalid entries cannot be saved. - Valid TTO code entry is allowed when the SOC code is blank.

You can track any hazardous materials associated with this position using the Hazardous Material Exposure panel. Enter each hazardous materials Material Code that people in this position encounter.

Working with Miscellaneous GL Segments

Use the Misc GL panel to review Misc GL Counts (predefined wildcards) for this position and enter replacement Misc GL Segments.

Note: During payroll processing, the system substitutes the GL segments for wildcards in GL account codes. These wildcards must also be included in the following setups:

When working with miscellaneous GL segments:

  1. The predefined wildcards display in rows in the Misc GL Count column, where the codes are always EEMJB01 through EEMJB99. (The program that evaluates the wildcards only looks for those values.)

  2. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Description. For example, EEMJB01 = Segment 1 and EEMJB02 = Segment 2. (You can apply these misc segments to account codes for other areas besides pay, such as taxes or deductions.)

Important! Any changes made to the descriptions affect all positions in the active client.

Note: The Misc GL Description column’s values are for reference only. (These descriptions are stored in the client’s record.) The system automatically loads these values each time a position record displays.

  1. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Segment value that replaces the Misc GL Count wildcard.

Note: When the system evaluates the Misc GL Segments, they are always based on the “home” job, which is different from the way segments are evaluated for departments (that is, for account codes for payment, the system uses the timesheet “worked-for” department).

  1. Click Save.

Maintaining ADA Parameters

You can maintain the American with Disabilities Act (ADA) parameters associated with this position using the ADA Position Description panel. Under the ADA, written job descriptions can be considered evidence of essential job functions, if they are accurate.

Complete these fields as required.

Field Name Description
Last Updated Enter the date when the position description was last updated.
ADA Review Date Enter the date when the position was last reviewed for compliance with ADA standards.
ADA Reviewer’s Name Enter the name of the person who performed the ADA review.

Defining Position Code Cost/Bill Information

You can define pay codes, pay rates, and bill rates associated with this position using the Position Code Cost/Bill Maintenance panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field Name — Description

Pay Code — Enter each pay code to which rates apply.

Pay Rate — Enter the pay rate that the client pays for this position. If left blank, the system uses an employee’s standard pay. The pay rate might be overridden by a value set in Employee Details.

Bill Rate — Enter the rate to bill for the pay code. This bill rate might be overridden by a value set in Employee Details.

Override Method — Select the override method to indicate whether the code is used as a rate or markup. This overrides the standard client selection.

Defining Skills

You can define the skills associated with this position using the Required Skills panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field Name Description
Skill Code Enter each code for the skills required for employees in this position.
Competency Level Enter the required competency level.
Recertify Days Enter the interval for recertification.

Defining Hours Worked

You can define the hours worked for this position using the Equivalent Hours Worked panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field Name — Description

Autofill Hours — Enter the default number of equivalent hours to use. Click Autofill to enter that value for all pay code Hours in the table.

Pay Code — Enter each pay code to define equivalent hours for this position. You must set the pay reason for these pay codes to Units.

Hours — Enter the equivalent number of hours worked when paying an employee for this position with the pay code.

  1. Click Save.

Accessing Additional Information from the Actions Menu

You can access other information and settings from the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

.

Related Topics

Maintaining Position Classifications

Defining Pay Grades

Maintaining Worksite Locations

Setting Additional Client Parameters

Using the Data Import Tool

========================================================================

Prefix/Suffix Overrides

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Prefix_Suffix_Overrides.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Prefix_Suffix_Overrides.htm

Prefix/Suffix Overrides

Use the Prefix/Suffix Overrides panel in ASO Global G/L Account Setup to establish the override rules used for global prefix and suffix options.

For example, if the When Prefix/Suffix value is DEPARTMENT, and the is equal to value is ADMIN, then PrismHR uses the replace with value of 100 for the prefix/suffix instead of ADMIN.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the When Prefix/Suffix term to override.

  2. Enter the is equal to term.

  3. Enter the replace with value to append to the account number instead.

  4. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Setting Up the ASO Global G/L Account

========================================================================

Using Print Service Options

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Print_Service_Options.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Print_Service_Options.htm

Using Print Service Options

Use this form to set up check printing for the client with the Print Service Options form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select Print Service Options from the Actions menu.

  4. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Number Of Days Before Check Is Void Enter a value between -1 and 180. Enter 0 if the void information should not print on checks. Enter -1 to use the system default.
SSN Print Option (Checks Only) Set up a printing format for displaying SSN on check stubs. You can suppress printing, display the full SSN, or mask all but the last four digits.
Check Print Form Order Formats printing of multi-form checks when building mvQuery check reports.
Check Stub Header Line Format mvQuery check format. Default setting is Client Name, Location, ID. Other options include Client Name or Employer Name.
Benefit Print Mode Displays the desired benefits on checks. Options are not printing benefits, printing retirement benefits only, or printing all benefits.
Sort Field 1, Sort Field 2 Select sorting order on checks. For example, Sort Field 1 can be set to EE Home Department and Sort Field 2 can be set to EE Home Shift.
Separate Check Print File If Sort Field 1 is set to EE Home Division, the Separate Check Print File field displays. Select this field to generate a separate check print file for each home division when payroll is processed. When you enable the Separate Check Print File field and process a payroll that includes employees with multiple, different home divisions, the system produces a check print file for each home division in the payroll reports labeled with the Print Service Check Report Name, the number of checks, the division code, a dash (-), and the division name. For example, “Regular Paychecks 2 Division NW1 - Northwest.” However, if the employee does not have an assigned home division (blank/null) the system labels the check print file with the Print Service Check Report Name, the number of checks, and “No Home Division.” For example, “Regular Paychecks 11 No Home Division.” Note: You do not need to set the Print Deposit Advices Separately field to Yes to use this feature because the separate Deposit Advices file is not expected to be divided by Employee Home Division (only the live checks that occur).
Source of Name/Address on Checks Determines where contact information is retrieved from to include on checks. Options are client address, employer address, or checking account address. This overrides the setting in System Parameters.
Print Full Address Only On Check Stub Select Yes to only include the full address on check stubs. Select No to include all information, including the name of the client.
Suppress Rate/Hours On Salaried Check Stub Sets whether hourly rate and hours worked will print on check stubs for salaried workers.
Current Details Hours To Use On Check Stub Determines whether hours worked, hours paid, both hours worked and paid, or units paid are listed on check stubs.
Current Earnings Sort Order On Check Stub Sets the default format for sorting current pay information on check stubs.
Check Pay Detail Summary Format Determines whether pay details are summarized by code, pay rate, or other factors.
Check Ytd Information With Earnings Specifies whether custom mvQuery checks should show current pay and YTD information in the same area of the check stub.
Include Sort Information In Check Address Window Displays check sort information above employee information in the check address window.
Include Memo Pay Codes In Current Earnings Section Select Yes to display memo pay codes in the current pay section.
Exclude suppressed Pay Codes in Gross Pay on Checks? When on the Pay Codes form, the Print on Paystub field is set to NO, Suppress Printing on Pay Stub, the following grid illustrates the functionality of this field: [Image: screenshot]
Use Benefit Plan Description For Deductions With Benefits Includes the benefit deduction description instead of the code on employee pay stubs.
Display Employee Pay Method With Current Earnings Select Yes to print an employee’s pay method in the Current Earnings section of their check.
Pay Detail Select up to two pay detail field names to print on employee pay stubs for this client. Enter a Column Name to print on the pay checks for the pay detail value. > Note: Note the following: - When you set the project parameter with its prevailing wage, if the prevailing wage for the project is greater than the prevailing wage for the position, the check stub displays the prevailing wage from the project. - You can enter anything in the Column Name field, but the check format might not support many characters. Re-print a check to test whether the column names display correctly.
  1. Click Accept.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Establishing Project Classes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Project_Classes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Project_Classes.htm

Establishing Project Classes

Set codes that represent project types with the Project Classes form. Create project classes before attempting to create project phases and cost centers.

To set up project classes:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Project Classes.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
Project Class Enter the Project Class ID. Enter a project class ID.
Class Description Enter a brief description for the project class.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Establishing Project Phases

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Project_Phases.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Project_Phases.htm

Establishing Project Phases

Set project class phases using the Project Phases form.

Note: Note: Project classes, to which you assign Project Phases, must already exist. See Establishing Project Classes for more information.

To set project phases:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Project Phases.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
Project Class Enter the class to which this project phase belongs.
Phase Code Enter the unique code that represents this phase of the project.
Phase Description Enter a brief description for the project phase.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Projects

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Projects.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Projects.htm

Maintaining Projects

You can set project information using the Projects form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Click the Data Import Tool icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) to import projects for clients to reduce the amount of manual work required. (See the Payroll Administration Guide for more information about using the Projects/Cost Codes Import Template option to perform this import.)

Defining the Project

Define projects with the Projects panel.

To define the project, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Projects.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
Project Enter or select a unique project code. If you select this field, a selector form displays where you can search for a specific project code or its description or select a code from the list that displays. When this form opens, the project code, its description, certified payroll status, and obsolete status display. To filter the search further: - Select a Certified Payroll status (the default is All). - Display only Obsolete codes by selecting Yes (the default is No). To refresh the list, select Reset Search and Filters.
  1. Click Save.

Working with Miscellaneous GL Segments

Use the Misc GL Count, Misc GL Description, and Misc GL Segment fields to review Misc GL Counts (predefined wildcards) for this project and enter replacement Misc GL Segments.

Note: During payroll processing, the system substitutes the GL segments for wildcards in GL account codes. These wildcards must also be included in the following setups:

When working with miscellaneous GL segments:

  1. The predefined wildcards display in rows in the Misc GL Count column, where the codes are always EEMLPJ01 through EEMLPJ99. (The program that evaluates the wildcards only looks for those values.)

  2. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Description. For example, EEMLPJ01 = Segment 1 and EEMLPJ02 = Segment 2. (You can apply these misc segments to account codes for other areas besides pay, such as taxes or deductions.)

Important! Any changes made to the descriptions affect all projects in the active client.

Note: The Misc GL Description column’s values are for reference only. (These descriptions are stored in the client’s record.) The system automatically loads these values each time a project record displays.

  1. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Segment value that replaces the Misc GL Count wildcard.

  2. Click Save.

Defining Other Information

Enter other project information with the Options panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Track Phases — Select if the phases of this project are tracked for job costing purposes.

Project Class — Enter a class code for the project.

Other W/C Coverage In Place — Select if Workers’ Compensation Insurance Coverage has been established for this project. Note: This field only displays if you enable specific custom suffix codes.

Obsolete — Select if this project is no longer used.

Union Project — Select if this project is associated with a union. When you select this option, the Union Code field displays and you can enter the union that owns the project.

  1. Click Save.

Defining the Certified Payroll Information

Use three panels to define certified payroll information for projects that are subject to certified payroll regulations.

Defining Certified Payroll Details Report Information

Enter any information required for reports in the Certified Payroll Details panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Certified Payroll Report Format Select a report format. For example, select MA, or Massachusetts mvQuery.
Wage Decision Number Enter a value for prevailing wage rates assigned to this certified project.
Wage Decision Date Enter a date for wage decision.
Project City Enter the city where the certified project is located.
Project State Enter the state where the certified project is located.
  1. Click Save.

Maintaining Pay Rates

Set the pay rates for each employee that works on a certified project in the Certified Pay Rates panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Job Code — Enter each job code (position) associated with this certified project.

Base Rate — Enter the portion of the job rate used to calculate the overtime rate. Note: In addition to the Base Rate, the system adds the Fringe Rate (see below) to the overtime calculation according to the system design for the certified payroll.

Fringe Rate — Enter the fringe portion of the job rate.

Prevailing Wage Rate — The Prevailing Wage Rate is calculated based on the Base Rate and Fringe Rate values.

Use Higher of Prevailing Wage Rate or Employee’s Pay Rate — Select if the system should use whichever rate is higher, otherwise, the system uses the job rate defined here.

Subtract Benefit/Hour from Calculate Pay rate — Select to subtract the employee’s cost of benefits per hour from the employee’s rate when determining the higher rate.

Filter Cert Pay on Jobs — Select to filter certified payroll on job codes.

Defining Certified Payroll Report Setup Information

Specify information that appears on reports with the Certified Payroll Report Setup panel.

Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Contractor Or Subcontractor — Select whether a contractor or subcontractor is working on this project.

Name of Contractor — Enter the contractor’s name as listed on the certified payroll form.

Address — Enter the contractor’s address to print on the certified payroll report.

Project and Location — Enter the project and location where the project work takes place.

Project or Contract No. — Enter a project or contract number.

Signatory Name — Enter the name that appears on the certified payroll form, which is the person responsible for this project.

Signatory Title — Enter the title that appears on the certified payroll form.

Fringe Benefits Paid to Approved Plans — Select if fringe benefits are paid to approved plans, funds, or programs.

Fringe Benefits Paid In Cash — Select if fringe benefits are paid in cash.

Report Hours Paid Instead Of Hours Worked — Select if you want to include pay codes in the report that are flagged as being included in the certified payroll report but do not represent hours worked, such as sick time.

Submitting Certified Payrolls to California

Enter information in the Certified Payroll California XML Parameters panel if the client must submit certified payrolls in an XML file to the state of California.

Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

CA License Type — Select the license type: Contractor State License Board, Professional License, or Other License.

CA License No — Enter the license number that should be presented in the CA XML file. If you selected Other License as the CA License Type, you should enter License Type : License Number in this field.

CA PWCR — Enter this value, which is the California Public Works Contractor Registration number. It should be a 10-digit number, or enter NA for not applicable.

CA Ins Number — Enter the number to be presented for this project in the CA XML file.

CA Contractor Email — Enter the email address to use in the CA XML for this project.

Awarding Body — Enter the name of the public entity that owns the project.

Contract Agency Id — > Note: Note: (1/21/21) - Because this field relies on other development work that is still in progress, it will not display on the output file until after the February 2021 release (even though it is visible on the form). Enter the ID of the contract agency.

Contract Agency — Enter the name of the contract agency.

CA Awarding Body Id — Enter the ID number of the public entity that owns the project.

CA Awarding Body Proj No — Enter the project number assigned to the project by the public entity.

CA Awarding Body Contract Id — Enter the contract ID given by the public entity to the project.

CA Stmt of NonPerformance — Select only if you need to indicate a state of non-performance. The system will not include employees in the file. Do not select this option if you want to include employees in the file (this is typical, and the value in the CA XML file will be false for this option).

Accessing Additional Information from the Actions Menu

You can access other information and settings using the Actions menu:

========================================================================

Maintaining Property Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Property.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Property.htm

Maintaining Property Codes

Set codes for property that a company can assign to employees with the Property form. Company property can include cell phones or company cars.

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Property.

  3. Complete these fields.

Field Name Description
Property Code Select a property code, such as CELL for a mobile phone.
Description Enter a description for this item.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Creating Time Off Absence Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Absence_Codes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Absence_Codes.htm

Creating Time Off Absence Codes

Absence codes are specialized reason codes that describe the reason for employee absences. Use the Time Off Pay form to create codes for all absences, paid and unpaid. Paid absence codes are associated with a Time Off Accrual Schedule.

Note: Note: Define the Time Off Accrual Schedule before creating any Absence Codes. (See Creating Time Off Accrual Schedules.)

Use the Time Off Pay panel to create codes for all absences.

To create an absence code:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Pay. The Time Off Pay form opens.

  3. Complete the following:

Field — Description

Absence Code — Enter a brief, descriptive code that represents the absence type, such as SICK for an employee illness.

Reason — Enter a descriptive reason for the absence, such as Sickness. This reason appears on absence report.

Updates Time Off Register — Select whether to post the hours under taken this absence code to employee Time Off accrual schedules (Time Off accrual schedules are associated with this absence code in the Accrual Schedule panel; see below). Note: If the absence type accrues time, it will update the Time Off accrual schedule in order to keep track of the hours an employee has taken, such as vacation and sick time. Some absence codes, such as jury duty or bereavement, might not update a Time Off accrual schedule.

FMLA Leave — Select for an absence that is a Family Medical Leave Act event.

Use Global PTO — Displays the Global Register Types panel instead of the Accrual Schedule panel (see below).

Pay Code/Pay Description — Enter a value that, when paid to employees, deducts the hours paid from the Time Off Accrual Schedule for this absence code. The Pay Description displays. Note: You can only enter or select restricted pay codes (that is, pay codes assigned to the client in the Control tab on the Client Details form) when you select the Pay Code link.

Accrual Schedule/Description/Time Off Type — If this absence updates a Time Off Accrual Schedule, enter each of the relevant Accrual Schedule. The Description and Time Off Type displays. Note: All accrual schedules specified for an absence code must have the same Time Off Type Code.

Global Register Types/Description — If you selected Use Global PTO above, this panel replaces the Accrual Schedule panel. Assign system-level paid sick leave accrual schedules here.

  1. Click Save.

Defining Leave Requests

These settings define whether or not employees can make leave requests in advance, how many hours of leave they may request, and how far in advance they may make the request.

Note: Note: In the Leave Pay Code and Leave Offset Pay Code fields, make sure that you enter valid pay codes that are used by the client. You can define pay codes on the Pay Codes form and you can assign them to a client on the Client Details > Control form.

To create a leave request:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Pay to view the Portal Configuration panel.

  3. Fill in these fields as required.

Field Description
Enable in Employee Portal Select to allow employees to request paid time off for this absence code in Employee Portal (EP). Selecting this option enables the other fields, which control the behavior of the EP time off request feature. This also makes the absence code available to employees in EP. If you select this option, you must enter the Leave Pay Code as well as a Leave Offset Pay Code for the relevant Pay Methods.
Minimum Hours per request Enter the minimum number of hours that employees can request in advance for this absence type.
Maximum Hours per request Enter the maximum number of hours that employees can request in advance for this absence type.
Can request this many days in advance Enter the maximum number of days into the future for which employees can request this type of absence.
May request with a negative balance Select if employees are allowed to submit leave requests when they have a negative hours balance.
Maximum Negative Hours Enter the maximum amount of hours that an employee’s balance is allowed to be in the negative when a leave request is submitted.
After leave is taken, requests can be made Specify how soon a leave request can be made after an employee has completed a previous leave with one of these options: - Up to this many days in the past - Do not allow requests that occurred prior to the payroll in progress - At Any Time (no restrictions)
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans.htm

Defining Time Off Plans

To define Time Off plans that determine employee time off accruals, use the Time Off Plans form.

Note: Note: The Time Off Register is where the system tracks how much paid time off the employees have accrued and taken. For more information, see Creating Time Off Accrual Schedules.

Each Time Off plan establishes limits on the amount of paid time off that employees can earn and how many hours they can carry over from one plan period to the next. Clients often have more than one Time Off plan. For example:

Note: Note: To copy a Time Off plan from another client, use the Copy from another plan option, and then edit the Time Off plan information as required.

To define a Time Off plan:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. Complete the following:

Field Description
Plan Code Enter a unique code for this plan.
Description Enter a description for this plan.
Accrual Method Select the Accrual Method used to accrue time off. Additional fields become available based on this selection. If you specify Unlimited, many of the fields are disabled and you cannot enter values in them. Note: If the client’s employees cannot carry over unused Time Off hours, enter 0 in the Annual Carryover and Lifetime Carryover fields. If there is no maximum number of hours, enter 9999.99.
Linked Accruals Maximum Balance Define the maximum number of hours the plan is allowed to hold, which the system will use to limit how many hours are transferred from the linked Accrual Register each year based on the Balance Plan’s Annual Carryover (only the hours needed to bring the balance up to (but not exceeding) the stop balance are transferred). (Leaving the Linked Accruals Maximum Balance field blank indicates that any amount can be transferred.) > Note: Note the following: - If you Copy from another plan that contains a Linked Accruals Maximum Balance amount, the system populates that field in the duplicated plan. - If you configure a Balance Time Off Plan with a Linked Accruals Maximum Balance limit and the employee’s current balance is below that limit, when the system processes a Linked Accrual transfer only the hours needed to bring the balance up to (but not exceeding) the stop balance are transferred. - If you configure the Balance Time Off Plan with a Linked Accruals Maximum Balance limit and the employee’s current balance is already at or above that limit, when the system processes a Linked Accrual transfer no hours are transferred to the Balance Time Off Plan. - If you configure a Balance Time Off plan with no Linked Accruals Maximum Balance limit, when the system processes a Linked Accrual transfer the system applies the full transfer amount with no change to current behavior.
  1. If you want to perform Time Off adjustments for the selected employee, select one of the following shortcuts:

Note: Note the following about these shortcuts:

  1. Click Save.

Panels displaying below the Time Off Plan panel vary based on the value selected in the Accrual Method field.

========================================================================

Defining First Year Prorated Amounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_First_Year_Prorated_Amounts.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_First_Year_Prorated_Amounts.htm

Defining First Year Prorated Amounts

You can use the First Year Prorated Amounts panel in the Time Off Plans form to change the number of hours employees will receive in their first year of employment, which helps handle numerous time off changes. For example, if a client allows five hours of time off to accrue per pay period, they might only allow three hours to accrue per pay period for the employee’s first year, if they were hired from July to December.

To define first year prorated amounts:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. In Accrual Method, select Flat Amount. The First Year Prorated Amounts panel displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the Month and enter the Flat Accrual Amount and Max Per Year amount as required for the Flat Amount Time Off plan (see Defining Time Off Plans).

Note: Note the following:

  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Defining Time Off Plans

Understanding Unlimited Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Setting Up Flat Amount Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Flat_Amount.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Flat_Amount.htm

Setting Up Flat Amount Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

To set up a flat amount for Time Off plans, use the Flat Amount panel.

To set flat amounts:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. In Accrual Method, select Flat Amount. The Flat Amount panel displays.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Complete the following:
Field Description
Seniority Level For each seniority level: - Enter the After Months that employees must work to be eligible for each level of seniority of this time off. You must set the After Months for the first Seniority Level to 0 or else the system will not accrue time correctly. - Enter the Flat Accrual Amount to accrue at each level. - Enter the Max Per Year hours that determine when employee Time Off accrual stops when the total amount of accrued hours during a single plan year reaches the entered value. - Enter the Accrual Stop Balance limit (a fixed amount), which calculates this balance using the following equation: Employee’s Carryover (previous plan year) + Accurals during current plan year - Time Taken current plan year = Accrual Stop Balance Note: The calculated balance can never exceed the stop balance number but might not equal it. If the result of this equation equals the value entered, the employee no longer accrues time off until the result of this equation is below the entered value. Note: If you enter an Accrual Stop Balance that is greater than or equal to the Max Per Year, a warning message displays, “The Stop Balance will have no affect unless it is less than the Max Per Year.” To continue, click OK. In addition, if you set up a Time Off plan with an Accrual Stop Balance lower than the Max Per Year and you enroll an employee with an initial accrual amount greater than the stop balance, then that employee can accrue hours during the year if they use Time Off hours and their balance falls below the stop balance. - Enter the Maximum Carryover, which is the number of hours that carry over each year for that Seniority Level. Note: If you enter an amount in this field for a Seniority Level, it will override the Annual Carryover amount in the Time Off Plan. If you do not enter a Maximum Carryover for a Seniority Field level, the system uses the Annual Carryover amount.
  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Defining Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Defining Flat Amount by Hours Worked Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Flat_by_Hours.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Flat_by_Hours.htm

Defining Flat Amount by Hours Worked Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Define Flat Amount by Hours Worked as the Accrual Method for Time Off plans with the Flat Amount per Hours Worked panel.

To define flat amount by hours worked:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. In Accrual Method, select Flat Amount by Hours Worked to view the Flat Amount per Hours Worked panel. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

  1. Accrue a flat (a) hours for every (b) hours worked:
a. Enter the flat number of hours that employees accrue.
b. Enter the number of hours that employees must work to accrue that flat amount.
— —
  1. Enter the flat number of hours that employees must work to start accruing leave in the Begin accruing hours AFTER ___ hours worked field. (This field is associated with the Nebraska Healthy Families and Workplaces Act, in effect as of October 1, 2025.)

Note: Accruals differ depending on whether you enable If the actual hours worked are not an even multiple of the hours worked then accrue a fraction of the accrual hours.

  1. To indicate whether the system should accrue a fraction of time off hours if the actual hours worked are not an even multiple of the hours worked that you entered, enable If the actual hours worked are not an even multiple of the hours worked then accrue a fraction of the accrual hours.

  2. Complete the following:

Use this option — To do this

Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year — Enter the maximum number of hours accrued per year.

Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches — Enter the number of hours the system stops accruing hours.

Apply Carryover toward Maximum Accrual Per Year — Enable the Apply Carryover toward Maximum Accrual Per Year field to allow employees who work at qualified Colorado and Maine employers to carryover accrued leave. (There are yearly maximums on the accrued leave.) Note: Employees will stop accruing leave when the carryover hours plus the accrued hours reach the Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year value.

Apply Current Hours Taken before applying Stop-Balance limits — Subtract the hours used before applying a stop-balance limit. If you do not select this option, the system ignores the hours used.

Maximum hours for a detail time sheet entry — Enter the maximum number of hours that can be entered in the Hours Paid field on the summary or detail time sheet.

The following conditions apply to the values in the Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year and Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches fields:

If… — The system uses…

Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year is blank — the Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches value

Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches is blank — the Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year value

Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year and Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches have the same value — the Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year value

Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year value is greater than Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches value — the Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches value

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Defining Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Defining Hours Worked (by Hours) Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Hours_Worked_Hr.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Hours_Worked_Hr.htm

Defining Hours Worked (by Hours) Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

To define Hours Worked (by Hours) for Time Off plans, use the Pay Codes for Hourly Accrual and Hours Worked panels.

To define hours worked (by hours):

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. In Accrual Method, select Hours Worked (by Hours). The Pay Codes for Hourly Accrual panel displays.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. In the Pay Codes for Hourly Accrual panel, enter each Pay Code on which to base the accrual, such as regular pay. You must specify at least one Pay Code, because if left blank, no paid time off accrues because the system cannot complete its calculations.

  2. Enter the Accrual Threshold for each Pay Period used by the client in the Pay Period Accrual Thresholds panel. This limits the number of hours that employees can accrue for the specified pay period. If there is no limit on time off accruals, you can leave this table blank. [Image: screenshot]

  3. In the Hours Worked panel, complete the following:

[Image: screenshot]

Field — Description

Seniority Level — For each seniority level: 1. Enter the After Hours that employees must work to be eligible for each level of seniority of this time off. You must set the After Hours for the first Seniority Level to 0 or else the system will not accrue time correctly. 2. In the Accrue Per Hours Worked field, enter the number of paid time off hours that employees enrolled in the Time Off plan will accrue for each hour either worked or paid (specified in the Hours Type drop-down). 3. Enter the Max Per Week hours that employees can accrue. 4. Enter the Max Per Year hours that employees can accrue. 5. Enter the Accrual Stop Balance, which is the total number of hours per month/year that employees can accrue. Accruals stop at this amount.

Hours Type — Select either Worked or Paid. If no value is set, the system assumes hours worked.

Apply Current Hours Taken before applying Stop-Balance limits — Select to subtract the hours used before applying a stop-balance limit. If you do not select this option, the system disregards the hours already used.

Enforce Yearly Maximum By Pay Period — Select to enforce the yearly maximum for this type of accrual on a pay period basis (yearly max divided by pay periods per year). If you select this option, the system ignores the yearly maximum, but not at the pay period level.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Defining Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Defining Hours Worked (by Months) Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Hours_Worked_Mt.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Hours_Worked_Mt.htm

Defining Hours Worked (by Months) Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Define Hours Worked (by Months) as the Accrual Method for Time Off plans with the Pay Codes for Hourly Accrual and Hours Worked panels.

To define hours worked (by months):

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans.

  3. Set Accrual Method to Hours Worked (by Months) to view the Pay Codes For Hourly Accrual, Hours Worked, and Pay Period Accrual Threshold panels.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. In the Pay Codes for Hourly Accrual panel, enter each Pay Code on which to base the accrual, such as regular pay. The Pay Description for the code displays. You must specify at least one pay code, or no paid time off accrues because the system cannot complete the calculations.

  2. From Pay Period Accrual Thresholds, select a Pay Period (weekly, bi-weekly, semi-monthly, monthly).

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Set an Accrual Threshold to limit the number of hours that employees can accrue for a specific pay period. If there is no limit on time off accruals, leave this table blank.

  2. Fill in the remaining Hours Worked fields as required.

[Image: screenshot]

Field — Description

Seniority Level — For each seniority level: 1. Enter the After Months that employees must work to be eligible for each level of seniority of this time off. You must set the After Months for the first Seniority Level to 0 or else the system will not accrue time correctly. 2. In the Accrue Per Hours Worked field, enter the number of paid time off hours that employees enrolled in the Time Off plan will accrue for each hour either worked or paid (specified in the Hours Type drop-down). 3. Enter the Max Per Week hours that employees can accrue. 4. Enter the Max Per Year hours that employees can accrue. 5. Enter the Accrual Stop Balance, which is the total number of hours per month/year that employees can accrue. Accruals stop at this amount. 6. Enter the Maximum Carryover number of hours that can carry over from one year to the next.

Hours Type — Select either Worked or Paid. If no value is set, the system assumes hours worked.

Apply Current Hours Taken before applying Stop-Balance limits — Select to subtract the hours used before applying a stop-balance limit. If you do not select this option, the system disregards the hours already used.

Enforce Yearly Maximum By Pay Period — Select to enforce the yearly maximum for this type of accrual on a pay period basis (yearly max divided by pay periods per year). If you select this option, the system ignores the yearly maximum, but not at the pay period level.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Defining Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Defining Hours Worked (by Position) Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Hours_Worked_Pos.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Hours_Worked_Pos.htm

Defining Hours Worked (by Position) Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

To define Hours Worked (by Position) as the Accrual Method for Time Off plans, use the Pay Codes For Hourly Accrual, Pay Period Accrual Threshold, and Hours Worked by Position panels.

To define hours worked (by position):

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. In Accrual Method, select Hours Worked (by Position) to view the Pay Codes For Hourly Accrual, Hours Worked by Position, and Pay Period Accrual Threshold panels.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. In the Pay Codes For Hourly Accrual panel, enter each Pay Code on which to base the accrual, such as regular pay. The Pay Description for the code displays. You must specify at least one pay code, or no paid time off accrues because the system cannot complete the calculations.

  2. In the Pay Period Accrual Threshold panel, select a Pay Period (weekly, bi-weekly, semi-monthly, monthly).

[Image: screenshot]

  1. To limit the number of hours that employees can accrue for a specific pay period, set an Accrual Threshold. If there is no limit on time off accruals, leave this table blank.

  2. For each position that must accrue time off under this benefit plan, complete the following:

[Image: screenshot]

Use this option — To do this

Position Code — Enter a position code (for example, MECH for Mechanic). The Position Title displays.

Accrue Per Hour Worked — Enter the number of paid time off hours that employees enrolled in the Time Off plan will accrue for each hour either worked or paid (specified in the Hours Type drop-down).

Hours Type — Select the type of hours (Paid or Worked). If no value is specified, the system assumes hours worked.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Defining Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Defining Months Worked Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Months_Worked.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Months_Worked.htm

Defining Months Worked Accrual Method for Time Off Plans

To define months worked for Time Off plans, use the Months Worked panel.

To define months worked:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. In Accrual Method, select Months Worked. The Months Worked panel displays.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Complete the following:
Field Description
Seniority Level For each seniority level: - Enter the After Months that employees must work to be eligible for each level of seniority of this time off. You must set the After Months for the first Seniority Level to 0 or else the system does not accrue time correctly. - Enter the Hours Per Year that employees can accrue. - Enter the Accrual Stop Balance, which is the number of hours per month/year that employees can accrue. - Enter the Maximum Carryover, which is the number of hours that can carry over per year.
  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Defining Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Defining Unlimited Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Unlimited.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Unlimited.htm

Defining Unlimited Time Off Plans

Define Unlimited as the Calculation Basis for Time Off plans with the Pay Codes for Hourly Accrual, Pay Period Accrual Thresholds, and Flat Amount per Hours Worked panels. Any accrual information entered in those panels is ignored when Calculation Basis is Unlimited. Any fields related to carryover and accruals in the Time Off Plan panel are disabled because plans that offered unlimited time off do not accrue hours.

To define an unlimited Time Off plan:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Plans. The Time Off Plans form opens.

  3. In Accrual Method, select Unlimited. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Fill in fields as required for the unlimited Time Off plan (see Defining Time Off Plans). The system does not calculate hourly accruals for employees enrolled in unlimited Time Off plans, so completing fields in the Pay Codes for Hourly Accrual, Pay Period Accrual Threshold, and Flat Amount per Hours Worked panels is not required.

  2. Click Save.

Related Topics

Defining Time Off Plans

Understanding Unlimited Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Understanding Unlimited Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Unlimited_About.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Benefit_Plans_Unlimited_About.htm

Understanding Unlimited Time Off Plans

The Employee Time Off Register and Employee Time Off Register Inquiry forms contain fields that do not apply. They also do not include the Hours Calculated/Carry-over Details panel because that information does not apply to unlimited Time Off plans.

After the first payroll of the new year, the date fields in the registers might not update because there are no accruals. They update only after the employee uses time off hours in a posted payroll.

Note: Note the following:

Related Topics

Defining Unlimited Time Off Plans

Defining Time Off Plans

========================================================================

Defining Time Off Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Classes.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Classes.htm

Defining Time Off Types

Restrict the number of register types that can be assigned to an employee to avoid employee Time Off register duplication with the Time Off Types form. You need to create only one of each time off type (such as vacation or illness).

To set a Time Off type:

  1. Select the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Types. The Time Off Types form opens.

  3. Complete the required information in these fields:

Field — Description

Time Off Type Code — Enter a brief Time Off type code or select it by clicking the Time Off Type Code link. For example, SICK for sick leave.

Type Description — Enter a Time Off type description, such as Vacation or Illness.

Linked Accrual — Enable this field to mark the selected Time Off Type Code as a linked accrual (default is disabled).

Transfer To — Select a Time Off Type Code to transfer to another Time Off type. (This field only displays if Linked Accrual is enabled.) For example, if type A is linked/transferred to type B, type A does not display on the Transfer To list for other types to transfer to (effectively preventing anything from transferring to it).

  1. Click Save.

To remove a selected Time Off Type Code, click Delete. The following message displays, “Are you sure you want to delete this record?” Click Yes to continue.

Note: Note the following:

Related Topic

Creating Time Off Accrual Schedules

========================================================================

Creating Time Off Accrual Schedules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/PTO_Register_Types.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/PTO_Register_Types.htm

Creating Time Off Accrual Schedules

Use the Time Off Accrual Schedules form to create or update a Time Off accrual schedule. Time Off accrual schedules track the usable hours of Time Off that employees accrue over the course of the year. The events trigger Time Off accrual, and the strict definition of “year,” are defined on this form.

Note: Note: The Time Off accrual schedule indicates when employees accrue paid time off. The Time Off Plan indicates how much paid time off employees accrue.

To create a Time Off accrual schedule:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Accrual Schedules. The Time Off Accrual Schedules form opens.

  3. Complete the following:

Field Description
Schedule Code Enter a unique Schedule Code for this accrual. For example, V for vacation, S for sick, or P for personal time. (Required.) Note: For new Time Off Accrual Schedules, the Paid Absence option is enabled by default.
Description Enter an accrual description. (Required.)
Time Off Type Code Enter the Time Off Type Code that restricts the number of accrual schedules that can be assigned to an employee. (Required.) Paid absence benefits are typically provided on a yearly basis. The year-to-date period for tracking benefits is based on the anniversary of each employee’s hire date or some fiscal year basis. If you use anniversaries, the employee year ending dates will vary. If you use a fiscal year end basis, all employee accruals end on the same day.
Plan Year Based On Select the Plan Year Based On that this accrual tracks. (Required.) - Anniversary: - Fiscal:
  1. Click Save.

Scheduling Holidays

This setting displays if you set the accrual schedule Accrual Frequency to Holiday (see above). Use the Scheduled Holidays panel to ensure that the Time Off accrual accrues holiday-based Time Off at the appropriate time (determined by a “look ahead” period).

To schedule a holiday:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Accrual Schedules.

  3. In Accrual Frequency, select Holiday. The Scheduled Holidays panel displays.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Complete the following:

Field — Description

Look Ahead Days — Enter the number of days to look ahead for holiday-based accrual. This acts as an offset. For example, if the pay period start and end dates are June 1 and June 15, and the Look Ahead Days is 7, the system checks for holidays between June 8 and June 22.

Holiday — Click Holiday and select one or more holidays from the list, then click Accept. The Holiday Name displays.

  1. Click Save.

Defining Intervals That Trigger an Accrual

To define intervals (in months) that trigger an accrual, use the Scheduled Triggers panel.

To define an interval:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Accrual Schedules.

  3. In Plan Year Based On, select Anniversary. In Accrual Frequency, select Scheduled. The Scheduled Triggers panel displays.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Complete the following:

Field — Description

Starting Monthly Intervals — Enter the number of months during an employee’s first year of employment when paid time off hours accrue. The last interval in the list should be 12.

Subsequent Interval (In Months) — Define the regular interval (in months) when hours accrue after an employee’s first year.

  1. Click Save.

Using Customized Accrual Subroutines

If the client uses an accrual method that differs from methods previously described, use a customized accrual subroutine.

Note: Note: Contact a systems professional to design a subroutine using the parameters described here.

To design a subroutine:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Accrual Schedules.

  3. In Accrual Frequency, select Custom Basic Routine. The Custom Basic Subroutines panel displays.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. In Trigger Subroutine, enter a custom accrual frequency subroutine to determine whether hours should accrue for each employee. The format is:

SUBROUTINE SUBR.NAME(ABSENCE.REGISTER.REC,EMPLOYEE.SSN,ACCRUAL.TRIGGERED)

The variable ACCRUAL.TRIGGERED should return either a 0 (zero) or 1 (one). If the value returned is 1, the system calculates an accrual.

  1. In Calculation Subroutine, enter a customized subroutine to replace the standard daily accrual calculation. The subroutine must have the following parameter list:

SUBROUTINE SUBR.NAME(COMPANY.NO,EMP.SSN,REG.TYPE,ABSENCE.REGISTER.REC, BENEFIT.PLAN.REC,VOUCHER.REC,HOURS.ACCRUED)

The hours accrued should be returned in the variable HOURS.ACCRUED. The calling program does not accept the return of a negative number. If the system returns a negative number, it is set to zero instead. Do not return a number with an embedded decimal point because it will be truncated.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Rate Tables

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Rate_Tables.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Rate_Tables.htm

Rate Tables

Use the Rate Tables form to calculate client-sponsored benefit plan deductions and client match amounts. Once calculated, the system can report the total benefit premium amounts in box 12 (Code DD) of Form W-2.

Note: Note: You can use Rate Tables only in conjunction with Deduction Codes that have a Voluntary Deduction Type and an RT Calculation Method selected. See Maintaining Global Deduction Codes for more information.

To set up a rate table:

  1. Enter the unique Table ID.

  2. Select an Existing Effective Date for this rate table, or Enter New Effective Date.

  3. Enter a descriptive Table Name.

Note: Note: The Basis rate is either by Pay Period or by Month. Entering monthly rates is suggested unless the client company has only one pay cycle for all employees. When calculating during initialization, the rate found on the table is multiplied by 12 and then divided by 12, 24, 26, or 52, depending on the pay period (Monthly, Semi-Monthly, Bi-Weekly, or Weekly).

  1. Select the amount Basis for this rate.

  2. For each tier:

a. Enter the Tier level for the rate, for example, Family or Single.
b. Enter the employee Deduction Amount.
— —
c. Enter the Match Amount.
— —
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Establishing Employee Ratings

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Ratings.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Ratings.htm

Establishing Employee Ratings

You can establish employee performance ratings using the Ratings form. To access user-defined fields, click the Actions menu and select User Fields.

To establish employee performance ratings:

  1. Go to the Ratings form on the Client|Change menu and complete the following fields:
Field Description
Rating Code Enter or select the unique Rating Code.
Rating Description Enter the Rating Description.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Regenerating Invoice Accounting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Regenerating-Invoice-Accounting.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Regenerating-Invoice-Accounting.htm

Regenerating Invoice Accounting

This process lets you correct account number errors that were set up in G/L Account Setup files by regenerating revenue accounting on invoices. You make corrections to the file that is subsequently imported into a financial accounting system. You can regenerate all invoices or select a date range for regeneration. You need access to G/L setup and the client must have already posted payroll.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To regenerate invoices:

  1. Click Back Office.
  2. From Operations|Action, click Regenerate Invoice Accounting.
  3. Select a regeneration option:
  1. Click Run.

========================================================================

Using Report Parameters Feature

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Report_Parameters.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Report_Parameters.htm

Using Report Parameters Feature

The Report Parameters feature allows you to specify run-time parameters for some of the reports that print for this client when a user processes the payroll. The reports in the list are specified in the Client Details Payroll tab.

Not all reports allow you to specify default parameters. The reports that do are listed below. The other reports have set parameters that you cannot customize for the client.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: If a report is set at the global level, users can edit the default parameters from the main Client menu.

Related Topics

Maintaining Client Details

Client Details Controlling Client Payroll Processing

System Parameters Printing Setup for Global Payroll Reports

========================================================================

Using Report Print Options

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Report_Print_Options.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Report_Print_Options.htm

Using Report Print Options

Use the Report Print Options form to determine what prints on payroll reports.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select Report Print Options from the Actions menu.

  4. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Suppress Deductions on Faxback — Prevents employee deductions from displaying in theFax Back Report.

Suppress ACH on Pay Register — Stops ACH account details from printing on the Payroll Register Report.

SSN Mask Override — Sets the format for how employee Social Security numbers display. Important! Updates to the SSN Mask Override setting determine how the system displays the SSN on the Personal tab on the Employee Details form and overrides the SSN Mask Option setting in the System Parameters form.

Batch Register Options — Specifies register options for the Payroll Register Report.

PDF Report Password — Sets a password for PDF report files. This overrides the password default set at the global level.

Print Service Report Logo Filepath — Specifies the complete path to the location on the mvQuery print server for report logo images. For example, C:.gif. See Setting Up Invoice Header Information for more information.

Name To Print [on] Invoices — Sets the name that appears on invoices.

  1. Click Accept.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Defining Benefits Billing Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Benefits_Billing_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Benefits_Billing_Report.htm

Defining Benefits Billing Report Parameters

Important! The Benefits Billing Report Parameters form, which was accessible from the Client|Change menu, has been retired. Instead, we recommend using the Benefits Billing Detail Report form, which provides helpful sorting options and filters to determine what displays in the Benefits Billing Detail Report. (See Benefits Billing Detail Report.)

========================================================================

Setting Calculate Checks Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Calulate_Checks_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Calulate_Checks_Report.htm

Setting Calculate Checks Report Parameters

Use the Calculate Checks Report Parameters form to determine the order in which information prints on the report.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set the Calculate Checks Report parameters:

  1. Use the Sort Parameters to determine the primary and secondary sorts for the report.

  2. Use Employee Sort to determine whether the report should sort the employees by name or ID.

  3. Click Save.

========================================================================

Setting Employee Check Acknowledgement Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Check_Acknolwedgement.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Check_Acknolwedgement.htm

Setting Employee Check Acknowledgement Parameters

Use the Check Acknowledgement Report Parameters form to specify the default parameters that the system should use when printing the Check Acknowledgement Report for this client.

To set the employee Check Acknowledgement parameters:

  1. Select the field that the report should Sort By.

  2. Select Include Direct Deposit Advice to include the advice for direct deposits.

  3. Select Include Hours to include the hours employees worked on the report.

  4. Specify the Employee ID to Include: the Employee ID, the Internal (client’s) Employee Number, or the Clock Number.

  5. Select Output File to create an output file.

  6. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Payroll Check Journal Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Check_Journal_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Check_Journal_Report.htm

Setting Payroll Check Journal Report Parameters

Use the Payroll Check Journal Report Parameters form to determine what information prints on the Check Journal report and in what order.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set the Payroll Check Journal Report parameters:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.

  2. In the Other Parameters panel, select the appropriate settings to include in or exclude from the report:

Select this field: — To do the following:

Display Pay Codes Using Timesheet Detail Format — Uses the same detail as the time sheet and voucher

Include Expense Reimbursements — Includes expense reimbursement pay codes

Include Non-Cash Pay Codes — Includes non-cash as well as cash pay codes

Include ‘Employee Total Expense’ on Report — Includes the Employee Total Expense, which is the sum of all pay and contributions

Sort on Codes instead of Descriptions — Sorts by code rather than description

Suppress Employee Names on the Report — Excludes employee sort names from the report

Consolidate Report Totals by Pay Code Only — Displays the totals by pay code, rather than detail lines

Exclude Check Detail Information — Excludes detailed check information (check number, check date, and period start and end dates), allowing users to see more employees per page

Display Zero Hours/Units For Fringe Pay Codes — Displays zero hours or units for fringe pay codes

Split Hours and Units Columns — Enters a page break on the primary sort field

Generate Page Break — Enters a page break on the primary sort field

  1. Select the Report Type.

  2. Select the Report Format.

  3. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Client Allocation Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Client_Allocation_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Client_Allocation_Report.htm

Setting Client Allocation Report Parameters

Use the Client Allocation Report Parameters form to specify the default information that the system should print on the Client Allocation Report for the client during payroll processing.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set the Client Allocation Report parameters:

  1. In the Report Parameters panel, determine how you want the report to display by completing the following fields:
Field Description
Allocation Format Select the Allocation Format. The number of columns included in the report based upon what you select displays. Allocation formats are managed in the Client Allocation Formats form. See Setting Client Allocation Formats.
Report Format Select the Report Format.
Report Type Select the Report Type. - Detail Report: Includes the detail information for each allocation level, sub-total, and report totals. - Summary Report: Includes allocation level sub-totals and report total.
  1. Select Other Parameters as appropriate.

Field — Description

Sort by Field Type Description — Select Sort by Field Type Description to sort by the allocation description associated with the Field Type.

Suppress Page Break on Primary Sort (Detail Report) — Select Suppress Page Break on Primary Sort (Detail Report) if you do not want the report to include a page break and sub-total for the Field Type.

Include Page Break on Primary Sort (Summary Report) — Select Include Page Break on Primary Sort (Summary Report) if you want the report to include a page break and sub-total for the Field Type.

Header Code — Select the Header Code. The Header Code displays under the report title. If your organization is not a PEO, the report title displays as Cost Allocation Report. All others display as Client Allocation Report.

Print Detail Line if Zero — Select Print Detail Line if Zero to print detail lines in the report even if the value is zero.

Suppress Miscellaneous Billing — Select Suppress Miscellaneous Billing to exclude miscellaneous billing from the report.

  1. Enter Header Options to determine what displays in the report’s header.
Field Description
Header Code Enter the Header Code. - Payroll Number: Displays in the header of the report. - Invoice Number: Displays in the header of the report. - Both: Displays both the Payroll Number (Batch Number) and Invoice Number in the header of the report.
  1. Enter the Output File Options if you want to create an output file of the report.
Field Description
Output File Select Output File to create an output file of the report.
Output File Params Select the File Output Params, which are the parameters to use in the output file.
Output File Totals Select Output File Totals if you want to include totals in the output file.

Note: Note: The following options only affect the output file (Excel) versions of the report. They do not affect the PDF versions of the report. You can save the parameters and retain the defaults, if you decide not to generate an Excel version of the report.

Note: Note: These options only affect the Detail version of the report; the Summary version does not have employee information.

  1. Enter the Allocation and Sort Parameters in the table, in display order. The fields entered in this table control how the report is allocated and displayed.
Field Description
Field Type Select the Field Type. This field controls the sort; select at least one field type. There is no limit to the number of fields you can enter.
Field Labels You can enter custom Field Labels to go with the Field Type. For example, if allocating the Field Type DEPARTMENT, the label in the report displays DEPARTMENT unless the Field Labels is entered as Dept, then the report displays Dept.
Sort/Detail Select one of the following from the Sort/Detail drop-down: - Sort By: Includes the Field Type as part of the sort. - Detail Only: Displays details about the Field Type, but does not include the Field Type in the sort.
  1. Click Save.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

• Save Global: Saves a global parameters record; do this to define standard parameters for your organization that should apply to any clients that do not have their own parameters set for the report. Client-level parameters always override global-level parameters.

• Delete Global: Deletes the global parameters record; any client that does not have custom parameters uses the default parameters for the report.

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Deduction Register Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Deduction_Register_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Deduction_Register_Report.htm

Setting Deduction Register Report Parameters

Use the Deduction Register Report Parameters form to determine what information prints on the Deduction Register Report and in what order. This report lists all payroll deductions and the amount the employer contributes.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set the Deduction Register Report parameters:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.

  2. In the Report Parameters panel, complete the following fields:

Field Description
Detail Sort Select the Detail Sort to specify the way information displays and sorts on the report: - Employee Name: This is the default option. If used as the Detail Sort, the report groups and sub-totals all deductions by employee. - Deduction Code: Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report by deduction code. - Deduction Description: Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report by deduction description. - Deduction Code, Benefit Plan (Sub-Totaled Separately): Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report first by benefit plan (as a sub-total within the deduction), then by deduction code. - Deduction Description, Benefit Plan Description (Sub-Totaled Separately): Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report first by benefit plan description (as a sub-total within the deduction), then by deduction description. - Benefit Plan, Deduction Code (Sub-Totaled Separately): Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report first by deduction code (as a sub-total within the benefit plan), then by benefit plan. - Benefit Plan Description, Deduction Description (Sub-Totaled Separately): Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report first by deduction description (as a sub-total within the benefit plan), then by benefit plan description. - Deduction Code and Benefit Plan (Sub-Totaled Combined): Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report by the combination of the deduction code and the benefit plan. - Deduction Description and Benefit Plan Description (Sub-Totaled Combined): Sorts and sub-totals the details in the report by the combination of the deduction description and the benefit plan description. - Benefit Plan and Deduction Code (Sub-Totaled Combined): Sort and sub-totals the details in the report by the combination of the benefit plan and the deduction code. - Benefit Plan Description and Deduction Description (Sub-Totaled Combined): Sort and sub-totals the details in the report by the combination of the benefit plan description and the deduction description.
  1. Select the Other Parameters as appropriate.

Field — Description

Sort on Sort Parameters Descriptions — Sort on Sort Parameters Descriptions: Use the sort parameters descriptions instead of the codes for the options entered in Primary Sort, Secondary Sort, and Tertiary Sort.

Page Break on Primary Sort — Page Break on Primary Sort: Start a new page for a new Primary Sort.

Suppress Pay Group in Header — Suppress Pay Group in Header: Exclude the Pay Group, Pay Period Start, and End Dates in the report header.

Suppress Zero Deductions — Suppress Zero Deductions: Exclude zero deductions. The default is to show all deductions, even zero balance ones.

Output File — Output File: Generate a comma-delimited output file.

Include Return and Retain Amounts — Include Return and Retain Amounts to include the Retained Amount and Returned Amount columns on the report.

  1. Click Save. To apply setting for only this client.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting ACH Direct Deposit Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Employee_ACH_Direct_Deposit_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Employee_ACH_Direct_Deposit_Report.htm

Setting ACH Direct Deposit Report Parameters

Use the ACH Direct Deposit Report Parameters form to determine what information prints on the ACH Direct Deposit Report for transactions generated with a Payroll. The report is automatically produced with all other payroll reports during payroll processing.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set ACH Direct Deposit Report parameters, do the following:

  1. Select the Show Full Bank Account Number option to include the full bank account number in the report. If not selected, only the last 4 digits display.

  2. Select Output File to create a .csv output file of the report that can be opened in Excel or another spreadsheet application. If not selected, the report prints in PDF format.

  3. Click Save.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

• Save Global: Saves a global parameters record; do this to define standard parameters for your organization that should apply to any clients that do not have their own parameters set for the report. Client-level parameters always override global-level parameters.

• Delete Global: Deletes the global parameters record; any client that does not have custom parameters uses the default parameters for the report.

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Fax Back Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Fax_Back_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Fax_Back_Report.htm

Setting Fax Back Report Parameters

Use the Fax Back Report Parameters form to determine what information prints on the report and in what order.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set parameters for the Fax Back report:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Extra lines on breaks Enter the number of Extra lines on breaks to include on the report, if any.
Pay Rate Display Indicate the Pay Rate Display default for the report.
Sort By Specify how the report should sort: - Select the field to Sort By. These are entities used by the client. - From the Sort Field By drop-down, indicate whether the system should use the code or the description to sort the items.
  1. Click Save.

To include employee deductions in the report, you must enter the Custom Feature CodeFAXBACKDEDN in System Parameters; see Maintaining System Parameters.

When this custom feature code is in place, you can suppress employee deductions for individual clients by selecting Suppress Deductions on Faxback in the Report Print Options form, accessed from the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

in Client Details; see Using Report Print Options.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

• Save Global: Saves a global parameters record; do this to define standard parameters for your organization that should apply to any clients that do not have their own parameters set for the report. Client-level parameters always override global-level parameters.

• Delete Global: Deletes the global parameters record; any client that does not have custom parameters uses the default parameters for the report.

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Gross-To-Net Register Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Gross-to-Net_Register_Report_Parameters.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Gross-to-Net_Register_Report_Parameters.htm

Setting Gross-To-Net Register Report Parameters

Use the Gross-To-Net Register Report Parameters form to set up the Gross-To-Net Register Report to run automatically with payroll. This report provides a list of employee pay for all pay codes.

To set the Gross-To-Net Register Report parameters, do the following:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.

  2. Complete the rest of the Sort Parameters panel fields:

Field Description
Detail Sort Select the Detail Sort to specify the way information displays and sorts on the report.
Report Type Select the Report Type: - Detail w/Break Totals: This option is the default. The report includes a break and sub-total for each of the sort options entered as well as a report total. - Detail Only: Displays only a report total; does not list sub-totals. - Summary Only: There is no detailed information, only sub-totals for each of the sort options entered, as well as a report total.
  1. Enter Other Parameters:

Field — Description

Employee Unique ID — Select the Employee Unique ID from the drop-down (Employee ID, Employee Number, Employee Clock Number).

Separate Hours/Units — Select Separate Hours/Units to display Hours and Units data in separate columns on the report.

Output File — Select Output File to generate a comma-delimited output file.

  1. Click Save.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Payroll Allocation Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Payroll_Allocation_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Payroll_Allocation_Report.htm

Setting Payroll Allocation Report Parameters

Use the Payroll Allocation Report Parameters form to set the default options for the report that displays payroll costs that are distributed across multiple cost centers, such as departments, divisions, or locations.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set the Payroll Allocation Report parameters:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.

  2. In the Report Parameters panel, complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Allocate Using — Select whether the report should Allocate Using gross pay, gross earnings, or hours paid.

Report Type — Select the Report Type: detail with break totals, detail only, or summary only format.

Exclude Contributions — Use the Exclude Contributions drop-down to indicate whether to include or exclude the contributions column.

  1. Select the Other Parameters as appropriate.

Field — Description

Sort On Allocation Codes Instead of Descriptions — Select Sort On Allocation Codes Instead of Descriptions to sort the report by the allocation codes; otherwise, it sorts by the description.

Page Break on Primary Sort — Select Page Break on Primary Sort to start a new page for the selected Primary Sort items.

Include Expense Reimbursement Pay Codes — Select Include Expense Reimbursement Pay Codes to include those pay codes in the report.

Include Non-Cash Pay Codes — Select Include Non-Cash Pay Codes to include those pay codes in the report.

Include Pay Rate with Pay Detail Information — Select Include Pay Rate with Pay Detail Information to display the pay rates with the pay details.

Suppress Client Bill Pending Allocations — Select Suppress Client Bill Pending Allocations to suppress any bill pending allocations and exclude them from the report.

Deductions Allocated to Employee Home Assignment — Select Deductions Allocated to Employee Home Assignment to prevent employee deduction allocations from displaying in the report.

Include Admin Fees (ASO Clients only) — Select Include Admin Fees (ASO Clients only) if this is an ASO client and you want to include the administrative fees in the report.

Include Sales Tax — Select Include Sales Tax to include sales tax amounts in the report.

Suppress Contribution Allocations — Select Suppress Contribution Allocations to suppress the allocation of contributions on the report.

Exclude Non-Billed Contributions — Select Exclude Non-Billed Contributions to exclude those amounts from the report.

Include Miscellaneous Charges — Select Include Miscellaneous Charges include those amounts in the report.

Include Administration Fees — Select Include Administration Fees to include those amounts in the report.

  1. Set the Output File Parameters by completing the following fields:
Field Description
Create Output File in column format Select Create Output File in column format to generate an output file. If you select this option, you can use the following options: - Select Group by Employee ID to group items in the output file by the employee IDs. - Select Include Descriptions for Codes to display the descriptions for the codes in the output file. - Select Include Additional Fields to include additional fields in the output file. - Select Include PTO Balances in Output data to include employee paid time off in the output file. - Select Include Pay Code column data only to include only the pay code column data in the output file. - Select Taxes Allocated to Employee Home Assignment to prevent employee tax allocations from displaying in the report.
  1. Click Save. When your organization processes payrolls for this client, the system generates the Payroll Allocation Report using these settings.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

• Save Global: Saves a global parameters record; do this to define standard parameters for your organization that should apply to any clients that do not have their own parameters set for the report. Client-level parameters always override global-level parameters.

• Delete Global: Deletes the global parameters record; any client that does not have custom parameters uses the default parameters for the report.

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Payroll Register Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Payroll_Register.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Payroll_Register.htm

Setting Payroll Register Report Parameters

Use the Payroll Register Report Parameters form to specify the default parameters that the system should use when printing the Payroll Register report for this client.

Note: Note: These are the settings for the reports that the system generates during payroll processing as well as the defaults for users running the report. When running the on-demand version of the report, users can select other options at runtime (depending on their user role security settings).

To set the Payroll Register Report parameters:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.

  2. In the Report Parameters panel, complete the following fields:

Field Description
Report Format Select the Report Format: - Standard: Includes information for each employee on the report, as well as the Current, MTD, QTD, and YTD values for Pay, Deductions, Taxes, and time off. - Compact: Displays the information in a columnar format and makes the Compact Format Parameters available (see below).
  1. Select the Other Parameters as appropriate.

Field — Description

Sort on Sort Parameters Descriptions — Select Sort on Sort Parameters Descriptions to sort the report by the descriptions instead of the codes selected as the Sort Parameters.

Page Break on Primary Sort — Select Page Break on Primary Sort to start a new page for the selected Primary Sort items.

Suppress Zero Deductions — Select Suppress Zero Deductions to exclude deductions with a value of zero from the report.

Suppress Zero Vouchers — Select Suppress Zero Vouchers to exclude payroll vouchers with a total of zero from the report.

  1. Select the Compact Format Parameters as appropriate.
Field Description
Include YTD Amounts Select Include YTD Amounts to include the year-to-date amounts for pay, deductions, and taxes on the report.
Include Employer Contributions Select Include Employer Contributions to include the employer’s contribution amounts for deductions on the report.
Sort Pay by Pay Code Descriptions Select Sort Pay by Pay Code Descriptions to sort the pay by the descriptions instead of the pay codes.
Sort Deductions by Indicate the order in which to Sort Deductions by: - Deduction Code: Sorts deductions by Deduction Code - Deduction Description: Sorts by Deduction Code Descriptions - Benefit Plan, Deduction Code: Sorts by the Benefit Plan ID associated with the deduction, if any, then the Deduction Code - Benefit Plan, Deduction Description: Sorts by the Benefit Plan ID associated with the deduction, if any, and then by the Deduction Code Description
  1. Click Save. When your organization processes payrolls for this client, the system generates the Payroll Register Report using these settings.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Payroll No Earnings Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Unpaid_Employees_Report_Parameters.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Unpaid_Employees_Report_Parameters.htm

Setting Payroll No Earnings Report Parameters

Use the Unpaid Employees Report Parameters form to set up the Unpaid Employees Report to run automatically with payroll. The report displays payroll information for employees who received no earnings in a specific payroll or during a payroll period.

To set the Payroll No Earnings Report parameters:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.

Select the Detail Sort to specify the way information displays and sorts on the report: employee name, employee ID, plan ID, or plan description.

  1. In the Report Parameters panel, complete the following fields:
Field Description
Report Type Select the Report Type: - Detail w/Break Totals: Includes a break and a sub-total for each of the sort options entered (except employee name), as well as a grand total for all employees. - Detail Only: Includes the detail information without sub-totals, only a grand total for all employees. - Summary Only: Does not include details, but only sub-totals for each of the sort options entered (except employee name) as well as a grand total for all employees.
  1. Select the Other Parameters as appropriate.

Field — Description

Employee Unique ID — Select the Employee Unique ID from the drop-down (Employee ID, Employee Number).

Include Last Week Worked — Select Include Last Week Worked to include the last week the employee worked in the report.

Output File — Select Output File to generate an output file.

  1. Click Save to apply settings for only this client.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Workers’ Compensation Report Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Workers_Compensation_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/RptParams_Workers_Compensation_Report.htm

Setting Workers’ Compensation Report Parameters

Use the Workers’ Compensation Report Parameters form to determine what information prints on the Workers’ Compensation Report and in what order. This report displays worker’s compensation paid in a single payroll or date range.

To set the Workers’ Compensation Report parameters:

  1. In the Sort Parameters panel, complete the following fields:
Field Description
Primary/Secondary/Tertiary Sort Set the Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Sort By categories.
Detail Sort Select the Detail Sort: - Employee Name: This is the default option. If used as the Detail Sort, the report sorts details by employee. - State: The report sorts details by the employee’s state. - W/C Code: The report sorts details by the worker’s compensation code. - State, W/C Code: The report sorts details first by the employee’s state, then by worker’s compensation code.
  1. In the Report Parameters panel, complete the following fields:
Field Description
Report Type Select the Report Type: - Detail w/Break Totals: Includes a break and a sub-total for each of the sort options entered (except employee name), as well as a grand total for all employees. - Detail Only: Includes the detail information without sub-totals, only a grand total for all employees. - Summary Only: Does not include details, but only sub-totals for each of the sort options entered (except employee name) as well as a grand total for all employees.
  1. Select the Other Parameters as appropriate.
Field Description
Employee Unique ID Select the Employee Unique ID from the drop-down (Employee ID, Employee Number).
Report Format Select the Report Format to use in the report (Wage Detail, Billing Detail).
Output File Select Output File to generate an output file.
  1. Click Save. When your organization processes payrolls for this client, the system generates the Workers’ Compensation Report using these settings.

The global links at the top right allow you to manage the report parameters for clients that do not have their own defaults:

• Save Global: Saves a global parameters record; do this to define standard parameters for your organization that should apply to any clients that do not have their own parameters set for the report. Client-level parameters always override global-level parameters.

• Delete Global: Deletes the global parameters record; any client that does not have custom parameters uses the default parameters for the report.

Note: Note: To restrict access to these global settings, review the instructions on setting field security in the PrismHR System Administration Guide.

Parent Topic

Using Report Parameters Feature

========================================================================

Setting Up Employee Time Off

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Set_Up_Plans.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Set_Up_Plans.htm

Setting Up Employee Time Off

You can use the Set Up Plans form to create or update the employee time off accrual schedule, plan, pay, and portal configuration.

Note: The Set Up Plans form displays as part of step 2 in the Time Off Setup Workflow process, which is accessible when you select a time off type in the Time Off Type form and click

[Image: screenshot]

(see Setting Up Time Off Plans). (This form cannot be accessed in the search menu and cannot be added to a user role. See Using the Time Off Setup Workflow Process.)

There are four panels in the Set Up Plans form:

[Image: screenshot]

You can do the following in these panels:

Note: Note the following when working in the Set Up Plans form:

Use the buttons in the Set Up Plans form to do the following:

Click — Action

[Image: screenshot] — Opens a panel.

[Image: screenshot] — Collapses an open panel.

[Image: screenshot] — Saves the information in the current open panel, then closes that panel and returns to the panel above.

[Image: screenshot] — Saves the information in the current open panel, then closes that panel and advances to the next panel in the form. For example, if you click [Image: screenshot] in the Accrual Schedule panel, the Plans panel opens. (You can advance to the next panel even if all the fields in the open panel are not complete.)

[Image: screenshot] — Returns to the Time Off Type form.

[Image: screenshot] — Advances to the Confirmation form, which is step 3 in the Time Off Setup Workflow process. Note: You must complete all the required fields in the panels before moving on to step 3, the Confirmation form. (This button is disabled until you complete those fields.)

[Image: screenshot] — Saves your information and returns to the Time Off Setup Workflow form.

Setting Accrual Schedule

Use the Accrual Schedule panel to set when employees accrue time off. (This panel defaults to open.) For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following when working in the Accrual Schedule panel:

To set the accrual schedule for a time off type:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Setup Workflow. The Time Off Setup Workflow form opens.

  3. Select the time off plan in the Batch ID column where you need to set the accrual schedule. The Time Off Type form displays.

  4. Select the Time Off Type from the options that display (the type description displays in highlighted text with the type name displaying underneath) and click [Image: screenshot] . The Set Up Plans form displays using the title of the time off type you selected. For example, Set Up PTO Accrual Plans.

  5. Complete the following:

Field Description
Schedule Code Enter a unique Schedule Code for this accrual schedule. For example, V for vacation, S for sick, or P for personal time. (Required.) Note: Click Create New Schedule to select a new accrual schedule for this time off type.
Description Enter a description for the accrual schedule. (Required.)
Plan Year Based On Select the plan year that this accrual schedule tracks, such as Fiscal. (Required.)
Last Day of Fiscal Year If the Plan Year Based On is Fiscal, enter the Last Day of Fiscal Year when each fiscal year ends. Note: The Accrual Frequency and on fields work together to determine when an accrual occurs and through which date the accrual calculates.
Accrual Frequency Select the accrual calculation that triggers during payroll processing. (Required.) - Pay Period Accrual: Accruals calculate for employees with regular vouchers in the payroll. Calculations are from the last accrued through date through the end of the selected on option. - Anniversary Month: Accruals calculate when the on option crosses an employee’s anniversary day, and the last accrued through date is before that day. - Anniversary Year: Employees receive a lump-sum accrual for a paid time off benefit at the beginning of their anniversary year for benefits accrued through the end of the current year. The system triggers this accrual frequency when the on option crosses over the employee’s anniversary day. - End of Month: The system triggers this accrual frequency when the pay period crosses into another month or ends on the last day of a month. Accruals calculate through the end of the month, or the employee’s anniversary day for the month, depending on the on option. - End of Quarter: The system triggers this accrual frequency when the pay period crosses into a new quarter. Quarters are based on either the year-end or employee’s anniversary date, depending on the on option. Note: A warning message displays when you select End of Quarter, “Warning: Flat amount is the only Plan Accrual Method supported by End of Quarter Accrual Frequency. The Year End Basis must also be Fiscal Year ending on 6/30.” Click OK to continue. - End of Year: Employees receive a lump-sum accrual for a paid time off benefit at the end of the fiscal year. When the end of the fiscal year corresponds to the end of the calendar year, the accrual triggers when the pay period crosses into the new year or the period end date is the same as the end of the calendar year. Otherwise, the accrual triggers when the period end date crosses the year end date in the current year. - First of Year: Employees receive a lump-sum accrual at the beginning of the fiscal year. The First of Year trigger works exactly the same as the End of Year trigger, except that the accrual level is based on the employee’s seniority level as of January 1st of the next year (instead of December 31st of the current year). - First of Following Month: The system triggers this accrual frequency when the pay period includes the first day of a month. Accruals calculate for the previous month. - First of Current Month: The system triggers this accrual frequency when the pay period includes the first day of a month. Accruals calculate for the current month. - First of Quarter: The system triggers this accrual frequency when the pay period includes the first day of a new quarter for employees enrolled in a Plan that has a calculation basis of Flat Amount and who are enrolled in a time off accrual schedule with the First of Quarter accrual frequency and the Pay Date on option. For example, if the first pay date in Q4 occurs on 10/7/2024, time off accrual occurs during that payroll. (Quarters are typically calendar quarters: Q1 = January - March, Q2 = April - June, Q3 = July - September, and Q4 = October - December.) > Note: Note the following: - A warning message displays when you select First of Quarter, “Warning: Flat amount is the only Plan Accrual Method supported for FQ Accrual Frequency.” Click OK to continue. - You can only select Pay Date as the on option if you select First of Quarter. - Holiday: Use the Scheduled Holidays panel to select one or more holidays when hours accrue. For more information, see Scheduling Holidays. - Prior Year Accrual: The system triggers this accrual frequency in the balance register to move the accrued time off from the accrual plan to the balance plan. The system initializes the on option when the pay period crosses over into the year’s end. The plan is triggered at year end from the accrual plan to the balance plan, which could be an anniversary date or a fiscal date, and uses the option set in the Plan Year Based On field. (Either way, the transfer of hours happens during the pay period in which that year-end date occurs.) - Custom Basic Routine: Select this accrual frequency when the client’s trigger methodology is unique and requires a custom routine to implement it. For more information, see Using Customized Accrual Subroutines. - Scheduled: Use the Scheduled Triggers panel to define certain intervals (in months) that trigger accruals. For more information, see Defining Intervals That Trigger an Accrual. > Note: Note: This option is available only when you set the Plan Year Based On to Anniversary.
  1. Do one of the following:
  1. — Click [Image: screenshot] in the Accrual Schedule panel to open the Plans panel and complete those settings.

  2. — Click [Image: screenshot] to save the accrual schedule settings and return to the Time Off Setup Workflow form.

Setting Up Employee Accrual Time Off Plan

Use the Plans panel to set up how much time off employees accrue. (You can set up multiple plans, such as a full-time plan and a part-time plan.) For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Use the buttons in the Plans panel to do the following:

Click — Action

[Image: screenshot] — To create a new plan. A blank plan opens below the current open plan. (This button is located at the bottom of the panel, so you can easily add another plan without scrolling up to the [Image: screenshot] button at the top of the panel if you have many plans open.)

[Image: screenshot] — To create a duplicate plan of the current open plan (displays beneath it), so you can use that plan’s selections to quickly set up another plan.

[Image: screenshot] — To create a new plan, which displays as a blank plan below the current open plan. (This button is located at the top of the panel.)

[Image: screenshot] — To delete the selected plan. After clicking [Image: screenshot] a warning message displays, “Are you sure you want to delete this plan?” Click Yes to continue.

To set up the employee accrual time off plan:

  1. If the Plans panel is not open, click the plus sign ( [Image: screenshot] ) to open it.

  2. Complete the following:

Field Description
Plan Code Enter a unique code for this plan. Note: To reuse information from an existing plan, select Copy from another plan.
Description Enter a description for this plan.
Accrual Method Select the Accrual Method used to accrue paid time off. Additional fields become available based on this selection. Note: For more information about the Flat Amount by Hours Worked option, see Defining Flat Amount by Hours Worked.
Add Hours To Balance On First Accrual Enter a flat amount to add on the accrual balance when the first accrual triggers for any employee assigned to this time off plan. Note: This amount only applies to plans with an Accrual Method of Flat Amount, Flat Amount by Hours Worked, or Months Worked. (Plans that use other Accrual Method options will display Add Hours To Balance On First Accrual as read-only.)
Accrue On Arrear Voucher Select if hours should accrue on arrearage vouchers.
Annual Carryover Enter the maximum number of unused hours that employees can carry over from one year to the next. Note: If the client’s employees cannot carry over unused Time Off hours, enter 0 in the Annual Carryover field. If there is no maximum number of hours, enter 9999.99.
Lifetime Carryover Enter the maximum number of unused hours that employees can carry over for the duration of their employment. This includes all plan years, starting from each employee’s start date.
Carryover Expiration Enter the number of days, months, or pay periods after the beginning of a new year that any unused carryover hours expire. Leave this field blank if hours do not expire.
Allow Negative Carryover Select if employees’ negative hours can carry over from one year to the next.
Usage Waiting Period Specify a usage waiting period to suppress employees’ accrued time off until after the specified period of time after their original hire date. Using the field and the drop-down, enter the number of hours, days, or months until employees can request time off, if appropriate for this time off plan. (This must be a whole number.) Note: Accrued time off will not display as available on pay stubs/advices until that many hours, days, or months have passed since their original hire date. If an employee leaves the company and is then rehired, the system uses the original hire date, not the rehire date.
Maximum Usage Limit Per Plan Year Enter the maximum use limit per register year that the employee can use.
Display Payroll Warning When Maximum Usage Limit Exceeded Select if the system must stop the calculation/initialization step of the timesheet process when one or more employees exceed the Max Usage Limit Per Plan Year.
Display Used Amount on Pay Stub Select this setting to display, on the memo line of the employee pay stub, the hours that the employee already used (year-to-date). Use this field to comply with California’s COVID-19 sick leave requirements for 2022. To use this setting, you must have Print On Check enabled for the corresponding accrual schedule. > Note: Note the following: - Most check formats support a maximum of four memo lines. - Currently, this setting prints the Plan Description in the memo line. This will be corrected soon to use the value in the Description for Pay Stub field on the Accrual Schedule panel. If you need to use this feature in the meantime, we recommend updating the Plan Description field to match or resemble the Pay Stub Name.
  1. Do one of the following:
  1. — Click [Image: screenshot] in the Plans panel to open the Pay panel and complete those settings.

  2. — Click [Image: screenshot] to save the plan settings and return to the Time Off Setup Workflow form.

Defining Flat Amount by Hours Worked

Define Flat Amount by Hours Worked as the Accrual Method for plans using the Flat Amount per Hours Worked panel.

To define flat amount by hours worked:

  1. In the Accrual Method field in the Plans panel, select Flat Amount by Hours Worked to view the Flat Amount per Hours Worked panel.

  2. Accrue a flat (a) hours for every (b) hours worked:

a. Enter the flat number of hours that employees accrue.
b. Enter the number of hours that employees must work to accrue that flat amount.
— —
  1. Enter the flat number of hours that employees must work to start accruing leave in the Begin accruing hours AFTER ___ hours worked field. (This field is associated with the Nebraska Healthy Families and Workplaces Act, in effect as of October 1, 2025.)

Note: Accruals differ depending on whether you enable If the actual hours worked are not an even multiple of the hours worked then accrue a fraction of the accrual hours.

  1. To indicate whether the system should accrue a fraction of hours if the time off actual hours worked are not an even multiple of the hours worked that you entered, enable If the actual hours worked are not an even multiple of the hours worked then accrue a fraction of the accrual hours.

  2. Complete the following:

Use this option — To do this

Maximum Amount Accrual Per Year — Enter the maximum number of hours accrued per year.

Apply Carryover Toward Maximum Amount Accrual Per Year — Enable the Apply Carryover Toward Maximum Amount Accrual Per Year field to allow employees who work at qualified Colorado and Maine employers to carryover accrued leave. (There are yearly maximums on the accrued leave.) Note: Employees will stop accruing time off when the carryover hours plus the accrued hours reach the Maximum Amount Accrual Per Year value.

Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches — Enter the number of hours the system stops accruing hours.

Apply Current Hours Taken Before Applying Stop-Balance Limits — Subtract the hours used before applying a stop-balance limit. If you do not select this option, the system ignores the hours used.

Setting Pay Information

Use the Pay panel to set the pay information for the time off type, which includes setting the Pay Code and Accrual Schedule. (You must enable Updates Employee’s Time Off Bank to display the Accrual Schedule field.) For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To set the pay information for a time off type:

  1. If the Pay panel is not open, click the plus sign ( [Image: screenshot] ) to open it.

  2. Complete the following:

Field Description
Absence Code Enter a brief, descriptive code that represents the absence type, such as SICK for an employee illness. Note: An error displays if you enter an existing Absence Code, “<Code> is an existing Absence Code.”
Reason Enter a descriptive reason for the absence (required), such as Sickness. This reason displays on the absence report.
Updates Employee’s Time Off Bank Select whether to post the hours using this absence code to employee’s time off bank. Note: If the absence type accrues time, it will update the employee’s time off bank in order to keep track of the hours an employee has taken, such as vacation and sick time. Some absence codes, such as jury duty or bereavement, may not update an employee’s time off bank.
FMLA Leave Select for an absence that is a Family Medical Leave Act event.
Pay Code/Description Enter a value that, when paid to employees, deducts the hours paid from the employee’s time off bank for this absence code. The Pay Description displays. (These settings apply when users enter time on the timesheet or import them.) Note: You can only enter or select restricted pay codes (that is, pay codes assigned to the client in the Control tab on the Client Details form) when you select the Pay Code link.
Accrual Schedule/Description If this absence updates an employee’s time off bank, enter each of the relevant Accrual Schedules. The Description displays. The system automatically populates the Accrual Schedule field with the following data from the Schedule Code field on the Accrual Schedule panel: - New Accrual Schedule: Data created for a new schedule using Create New Schedule. - Existing Accrual Schedule: Data from an existing schedule using Use Existing Schedule. (Selecting this link opens the Select Time Off Accrual Schedule list, where you can select an existing schedule for the time off plan.) > Note: Note the following: - The system re-populates the Accrual Schedule field anytime you update the Schedule Code on the Accrual Schedule panel. - All accrual schedules specified for an absence code must have the same Time Off Type.
  1. Do one of the following:
  1. — Click [Image: screenshot] in the Pay panel to open the Portal Configuration (Optional) panel and complete those settings.

  2. — Click [Image: screenshot] to save the accrual schedule settings and return to the Time Off Setup Workflow form.

Setting Portal Configuration

Use the Portal Configuration (Optional) panel to indicate whether an employee can submit a time off request in Employee Portal (EP). (All settings in this panel are optional.) For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: These settings control how the absence code behaves in Employee Portal (EP). (Absence codes are specialized reason codes that describe the reason for employee absences.)

To set the portal configuration for a time off type:

  1. If the Portal Configuration (Optional) panel is not open, click the plus sign ( [Image: screenshot] ) to open it.

  2. Enable the Can Request This Time Off Type in Portal field to allow employees to request time off using Employee Portal (EP).

  3. Complete the following:

Field Description
Minimum Hours Per Request Enter the minimum number of hours that employees can request in advance for this absence type.
Maximum Hours Per Request Enter the maximum number of hours that employees can request in advance for this absence type.
Can Request This Many Days in Advance Enter the maximum number of days into the future for which employees can request this type of absence.
May Request With a Negative Balance Select if employees are allowed to submit leave requests when they have a negative hours balance.
Maximum Negative Hours Enter the maximum amount of hours that an employee’s balance is allowed to be in the negative when a leave request is submitted.
After Leave is Taken, Requests Can Be Made Specify how soon a leave request can be made after an employee has completed a previous leave with one of these options: - Up to this many days in the past - Do not allow requests that occurred prior to the payroll in progress - At any time (no restrictions)
  1. If you completed all the required fields in the panels, click [Image: screenshot] to access step 3, the Confirmation form. (See Confirming Time Off Plan Settings.)

========================================================================

Setting Up Yearly Group-Term Life Tax Rates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Setting-Yearly-Group-Term-%20Life-Tax-Rates.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Setting-Yearly-Group-Term- Life-Tax-Rates.htm

Setting Up Yearly Group-Term Life Tax Rates

Set annual Group Term Life rates with the Tax Rates for Taxable Life Coverage form.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To set rates:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] .

  2. From System|Change, select System Parameters.

  3. From the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] , select Tax Rates for Taxable Life Coverage.

  4. Click Tax Year to select the year to which coverage applies. The form fills with age ranges and monthly rate per thousand for these age ranges. If the year does not yet exist, enter the new year into the Tax Year field.

  5. Copy Rates - Once you enter a Tax Year (say 2023) on the Tax Rates for Taxable Life Coverage form, the Copy Rates option becomes visible. This allows you the convenience of copying existing rates from one tax year to another instead of manually completing the table. Only users with Full Access to the Tax Rates for Taxable Life Coverage form will be able to see the Copy Rates option. You can also click the Tax Year hyperlink to select a tax year. If you manually enter a non-existing tax year then the Copy Rates option will not display. Click the Copy Rates hyperlink. A new selector named Copy Tax Rates opens as shown below.

Note: Note:

If you pull up an existing tax year record (say 2023), make changes but do not save the record and click the Copy Rates hyperlink, you will receive a warning message stating There are unsaved changes that will not be copied. Do you wish to continue?

The Tax Rates for Taxable Life Coverage form now also has the following buttons:

Cancel - Click Cancel to clear the form at any time. All unsaved changes will be lost.

Close - This button is displayed when this form is opened in a modal. Click Close to close the form. All unsaved changes will be lost.

  1. Change From Age/To Age as required, or click + to add a new age range.

  2. Change the Monthly Rate per Thousand of Taxable Coverage if required, or create new rates for any new age ranges you created.

  3. Click Save to save the record.

  4. Click Delete to delete the record.

  5. Click Cancel to clear the form at any time. All unsaved changes will be lost.

  6. Click Close to close this form at any time

========================================================================

Recording External PTO Balances on Check Pay Stubs

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Setting_Up_External_PTO.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Setting_Up_External_PTO.htm

Recording External PTO Balances on Check Pay Stubs

To accommodate service providers whose clients use time and labor systems with their own built-in PTO capabilities that are maintained outside of PrismHR, the system provides a process to record external PTO balances on check pay stubs for regularly scheduled, manual, and special payrolls.

Important! This feature does not apply to checks created using the Manual Check Entry process or the On Demand Check creation process.

Enabling the External PTO Feature

You can enable the External PTO feature using the External PTO used field, which displays on the Other tab in the Client Details form. For example:

[Image: Other tab in the Client Details form screenshot]

The following message displays when you select the External PTO used field, “Selecting this option will ignore any PTO setup in Prism and should only be set when PTO is being tracked externally. Do you want to continue?” Selecting Yes keeps the External PTO used field enabled and ignores any PTO set up in PrismHR. (Select No to disable this field.)

When you enable the External PTO used field, the following PTO set up in PrismHR is ignored during the payroll calculation process, including:

In addition, any PTO set up in PrismHR does not display on payroll vouchers or on PTO reports.

Note: After you enable the External PTO used field and then save the form, if you try to disable this field the following message displays, “Warning: this setting should only be unchecked if PTO is no longer being tracked externally, and any PTO that is set up in Prism should be used. Are you sure you want to continue?” Selecting Yes disables the External PTO used field and reverts to using PTO set up in PrismHR. (Select No to keep the field enabled.)

Processing Payroll

When processing payroll with the External PTO feature enabled, the system retrieves the following data from an external PTO file that the client provides to display on the check pay stub:

Note: The data that displays on the check pay stub matches the external PTO file by payroll number and employee ID. (If the employee does not have a check pay stub or is not in the payroll, the system ignores the data.)

During the payroll process, the system attaches each external PTO file to a specific payroll in PrismHR, which displays the most current PTO data on the check pay stub and maintains compliance with state requirements. (If the client does not submit an external PTO file for each payroll they process, the check pay stubs will not display any PTO balances.)

Note: Note the following:

Reprinting External Employee PTO Information on Check Pay Stubs

When you reprint a check pay stub on the Reprint Payroll Checks form, either with or without selecting the Rebuild field, while using the External PTO feature, the check pay stub displays the external PTO file data that corresponds with the payroll number and employee ID.

During this process, the system retrieves the most recent file data that was submitted prior to the payroll being finalized and posted.

Note: Note the following:

Post-Payroll Processing

Once you enable the External PTO used field, do not disable it after processing payroll.

After processing, the system locks the payroll and verifies if the client has finished submitting the current PTO file associated with the payroll’s number (applies to regularly scheduled, manual, and special payrolls). If the file is still uploading the system displays the following error message in the Process Payroll or SuperBatch forms, “External PTO data is currently being uploaded and must be completed before payroll finalization can continue.” (This applies to any user type finalizing payroll, including self-service worksite managers/worksite trusted advisors.)

========================================================================

Setting Company Shift Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Shifts.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Shifts.htm

Setting Company Shift Parameters

Set a company’s work shift parameters with the Shifts form.

To set shift parameters:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Shifts.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Shift Code — Enter a code for the shift.

Description — Enter a description of the shift.

Differential Method — Select a method to calculate shift differentials. If there is no differential, enter 0.

Differential Amount — Enter a percentage or fixed amount, based on the differential method selected.

Include in Pay Rate — Select to add this shift’s differential pay to the employee’s regular pay rate. Otherwise, it uses a separate pay code.

Regular Pay Code — Enter a code to pay the shift differential associated with regular hours.

Overtime Pay Code — Enter a code to pay the shift differential associated with overtime (premium) hours.

Overtime Pay Factor — Enter a pay factor (usually 1.5) to multiply the overtime shift premium amount when using a separate pay code.

Per Diem Percent — Enter the percent to allocate to non-taxable per diem when paid using the percentage method.

Calc O/T Differential on Straight Rate — Select to calculate the differential on overtime pay using the straight pay rate.

  1. Click Save.

Defining Shift Pay Rates

Set shift pay rates for the client with the Shift Pay Rates panel.

Note: Note: To define pay rates on the shift record, the Custom Features in Company Details need to include the SHIFTPAYRATES feature code. See Enabling Specialized Features.

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Pay Code Enter each pay code to populate the pay description.
Pay Rate Enter the Pay Rate for the pay code. Enter a pay rode for the pay codes
  1. Click Save.

Importing Shift Code Data

You can access the Shift Codes import template in the Data Import Tool from this form to import shift code data by clicking Import

[Image: screenshot]

.

The Shift Codes import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Shifts form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Shift Codes import template option.

Note: Note the following when importing Shift Codes data:

Accessing Additional Information from the Actions Menu

You can access other information and settings using the Actions menu:

========================================================================

Maintaining Skill Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Skills.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Skills.htm

Maintaining Skill Codes

You can maintain skill codes and related information using the Skills form.

To maintain skill codes and related information, do the following:

  1. Go to the Skills form on the Client|Change menu and complete the following fields:
Field Description
Skill Code Enter the Skill Code. If you are entering a new skill, use something brief but descriptive, such as CDLA for a Class A Commercial Driver’s License.
Description Enter a Description of the skill.
Differential Method Select the Differential Method used to calculate shift differentials. Leave blank if there is no differential.
Differential Amount Based on the selected Differential Method, enter a percentage or a fixed amount in the Differential Amount field.
Course Code/Points Earned/Certifies For each course that applies to this skill: - Enter the Course Code that employees can take to gain competency in this skill. The Course Name displays. - Enter the number of skill competency Points Earned upon completion of the course. This value overrides points on the course record. - Select Yes from the Certifies drop-down if the course provides certification for this skill.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topic

Setting Training Course Codes

========================================================================

Defining State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA)

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/State_Tax_Bill_Rates.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/State_Tax_Bill_Rates.htm

Defining State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA)

Define a client’s SUTA billing rates with the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) form.

Note: Note the following:

Setting a Location for State Tax Bill Rates

Set a location to which a state tax bill rate applies with the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) panel.

To set location:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA). [Image: State Tax Bill Rates SUTA form for Massachusetts]

  3. Fill in the required information in these fields.

Field — Description

State Code — Enter a two-character state code, or select it from the drop-down. The Client State ID displays.

Location Code (Optional) — Enter or select the Location Code where the billing rate applies. Leave this field blank if the billing rate applies to all client locations in the state.

Effective Date — Enter a date when the bill rate goes into effect, or select an existing date to edit.

  1. Click Save.

Setting SUTA Bill Rate Information

Set SUTA bill rate information with he SUTA Bill Rates panel. If the client has multiple employers, you can establish rates for each employer.

To set SUTA bill rate information:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) to view the SUTA Bill Rates panel. [Image: SUTA Bill Rates grid]

  3. Fill in the required information in these fields.

Field — Description

SUTA Bill Rate — Enter at least one SUTA Bill Rate for the state that applies to the client.

Employer — If appropriate, select the Employer to which this SUTA bill rate applies. To specify a different billing rate for different employers, enter that information on different rows. Otherwise, do not select an employer.

Overbill Credit Amt (Optional) — Enter the Overbill Credit Amt back rate only if it is different from the SUTA bill rate.

  1. Click Save.

Establishing Officer and State Bill Rates

Set officer and state bill rates with the Other Billing Rates panel.

To set these rates:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select State Tax Rates (SUTA) to view Other Billing Setup.

  3. Fill in the required information in these fields.

Field Description
Officer SUTA Rate Enter the Officer SUTA Rate, if it is different for officers.
SDI Rate Enter the employer’s SDI Rate if the employer pays disability insurance in this state.
Miscellaneous override rates Enter the miscellaneous override rates for employer-paid taxes. If you leave any of these fields blank, the system uses the default rate. - Enter the State Misc1 Rate (Tax ID 26). - Enter the State Misc2 Rate (Tax ID 28). - Enter the State Misc3 Rate to set employer tax rates for tax codes 22-41 (Massachusetts) and 48-41 (Washington). - Enter the State Misc4 Rate to set employer tax rates for tax codes 24-54 (Minnesota).
  1. Click Save.

Selecting Relevant Employers

Choose the relevant employers from the Lockdown Employer panel if Lock Down Employer is selected.

To select relevant employers:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select State Tax Rates (SUTA) to view Other Billing Setup.

  3. Select Lock Down Employer to view the Lockdown Employer panel. [Image: Lockdown Employer grid]

  4. Select Yes from the Lock New Hire drop-down to lock new or rehired personnel working in this state to the employer.

  5. Click Save.

Importing SUTA Billing Rates Data

You can access the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) import template in the Data Import Tool from this form to import SUTA billing rates data by clicking Import

[Image: import icon]

.

The State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: hammer and wrench icon]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) import template option.

Note: Note the following when importing State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) data:

========================================================================

Establishing State Tax Rates (SUTA)

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/State_Tax_Rates.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/State_Tax_Rates.htm

Establishing State Tax Rates (SUTA)

Set a client’s state SUTA information (instead of using the PEO’s state SUTA rate) with the State Tax Rates (SUTA) form.

To establish SUTA rates:

  1. Select Client.

From Client|Change, select State Tax Rates (SUTA).

[Image: State Tax Rates (SUTA) for Massachusetts]

Fill in the required fields.

Field — Description

State Code — Enter a two-character state code, or select it from the drop-down. The Client State ID displays.

Effective Date — Enter a date when the bill rate goes into effect, or select an existing date to edit.

  1. Click Save.

Note: Note the following:

Establishing Officer and State Bill Rates

Establish officer and state bill rates with the Rate Breakdown panel.

To set these rates:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select State Tax Rates (SUTA) to view the Rate Breakdown panel.

  3. Fill in the required fields.

Field Description
SUTA Rate Enter the client’s SUTA Rate for this state.
Officer SUTA Rate Enter the Officer SUTA Rate if it differs from the regular SUTA rate.
SDI Rate Enter an employer’s SDI Rate if the employer pays disability insurance in this state.
Miscellaneous override rates Enter the miscellaneous override rates for employer-paid taxes (for example, you can increase the tax rate paid by the employer). Note: If these fields are left blank, the system uses the default rate. Set these fields as follows: - Enter the State Misc1 Rate (Tax ID 26). - Enter the State Misc2 Rate only to set employer tax rates for Vermont Childcare Employee Tax Rate (Tax Code 48-28). If no tax rate is entered for the employer, but a tax rate is entered for the employee using the State Misc 2 Employee Rate field below, you will see the full amount for the employer calculated at 0.44%. The employee tax rate below does not offset the employer tax rate here. So, you must enter the tax rates for both the employer and the employee in this form if using overrides. - Enter the State Misc3 Rate to set employer tax rates for paid family medical leave for tax codes: - 22-41 (Massachusetts) - 48-41 (Washington) - 51-41 (Wyoming) - 08-41 (Delaware) - 20-41 (Maine) - Enter the State Misc4 Rate to set employer tax rates for tax codes 24-54 (Minnesota).
  1. Click Save.

Importing SUTA Rates Data

You can access the State Tax Rates (SUTA) import template in the Data Import Tool from this form to import SUTA rates data by clicking Import

[Image: screenshot]

.

The State Tax Rates (SUTA) import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the State Tax Rates (SUTA) form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the State Tax Rates (SUTA) import template option.

Note: Note the following when importing State Tax Rates (SUTA) data:

For example:

Note: These warnings are informational only and when you select Import, the system imports the data unless there are other failure messages. In addition, the warning messages display in the Confirmation Report after the import finishes with the “Success” import status.

========================================================================

Setting Up Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Time_Off_Setup_Workflow.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Time_Off_Setup_Workflow.htm

Setting Up Time Off Plans

You can use the Time Off Setup Workflow form to continue setting up in-progress time off plans or create new time off plans. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Important! You cannot update existing plans using the Time Off Setup Workflow process. Instead, you must edit existing plans in the legacy Time Off Work Center. (Click

[Image: screenshot]

in the header area of the Time Off Setup Workflow form to access the legacy Time Off Work Center.)

Note: Note the following:

Using the Time Off Setup Workflow Form

The Time Off Setup Workflow form contains two panels:

Column — Description

Batch ID — Displays the batch number that was assigned to the time off plan. (Clicking the number in the Batch ID column displays the Time Off Type form. You can edit the steps of the workflow and save any changes.)

Name — Displays the name of the time off plan.

Status — Displays the last step the user completed for the time off plan. Note: Click the link in the Status column to proceed directly to the time off plan’s step in the Time Off Setup Workflow process.

Time Off Type — Displays the time off plan type that was selected in the batch.

Last Modified Date — Displays the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format, when the time off plan was last modified.

Last Modified User — Displays the user ID of the last user who modified the time off plan.

Actions — Select Delete ( [Image: screenshot] ) to delete an in-progress time off plan.

Setting Up a Time Off Plan

You can create a new time off plan by selecting New Setup in the Client Time Off Setups in Progress panel. The Add Time Off Setup Batch form displays, where you can name the batch.

To set up a time off plan:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Setup Workflow. The Time Off Setup Workflow form opens.

  3. Complete the following as appropriate:

Panel Description
Client Time Off Setups in Progress (required) Select New Setup to create a new time off plan. The Add Time Off Setup Batch form displays where you can name the batch. (After naming the batch, that name displays back in the Time Off Setup Workflow form.) > Note: Note the following when using the Add Time Off Setup Batch form: - The Batch ID is automatically named “NEW” after clicking Save. - Each client starts a Batch ID at 1000, and every new batch they create increments from there. - You must create a batch Name before clicking Save.
  1. Select the plan you just created. The Time Off Type form displays.

To proceed in setting up a time off plan, follow the instructions in Setting Time Off Plan Type.

========================================================================

Setting Time Off Plan Type

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Time_Off_Type.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Time_Off_Type.htm

Setting Time Off Plan Type

You can use the Time Off Type form to set the type for the time off plan. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: The Time Off Type form displays as step 1 in the Time Off Setup Workflow process, which is accessible from the Time Off Setup Workflow form (see Setting Up Time Off Plans). (This form and its accompanying Add Time Off Type form cannot be accessed in the search menu and cannot be added to a user role. See Using the Time Off Setup Workflow Process.)

Understanding the Side Stepper

The side stepper displays your position in the Time Off Setup Workflow process. As you move through the process, each completed step displays in green. For example, the step shown in green below, Time Off Type, confirms that the time off type was selected (step 1), so you need to complete step 2, Set Up Plans, the next step in the process, which is highlighted in black:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Steps that display in gray are not complete.

Setting the Time Off Type

You can use the Time Off Type form to set the type for a time off plan by either selecting a standard time off type in the list that displays (the type description displays in highlighted text with the type name displaying underneath) or creating a new type.

To set the type for a time off plan:

  1. Click the Client menu.

  2. From Client|Change, select Time Off Setup Workflow. The Time Off Setup Workflow form opens.

  3. Select the time off plan in the Batch ID column where you need to set the type. The Time Off Type form displays.

  4. Select the Time Off Type from the options that display (the type description displays in highlighted text with the type name displaying underneath) or select Add Type to add a new type. For example, you can create a new “Personal Holiday” time off type in the Add Time Off Type form that displays. (Both fields in the Add Time Off Type form are required.)

Note: Note the following:

  1. Do one of the following:
  1. — Click [Image: screenshot] to advance to the Set Up Plans form, which is step 2 in the Time Off Setup Workflow process (see Setting Up Employee Time Off). (The [Image: screenshot] button is disabled if you did not select a time off type.) The system enables the Time Off Type step on the left side by displaying the step number in green, confirming that this step is complete.

  2. — Click [Image: screenshot] to save the time off type and return to the Time Off Setup Workflow form.

Note: You can edit existing time off types by clicking the pencil icon (

[Image: screenshot]

), which opens the Add Time Off Type form where you can update the Type Description.

========================================================================

Updating Group Term Life

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Update-Group-Term-Life.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Update-Group-Term-Life.htm

Updating Group Term Life

Update group term life taxable amounts for the plan year in the employee benefit enrollment records for life insurance with the Update Client Group Term Life form.

Note: Note: A Group Term Life (GTL) plan must be set up at the system and client level before performing an update. Employees must also be enrolled in a GTL plan under Benefits Enrollment so that system enrollment records exist.

To update group term life:

  1. Click Client.

  2. From Client|Action, select Update Client Group Term Life.

  3. Select a Client or enter a client ID.

  4. Select a plan year.

  5. Click Update. A report form displays with the date, time, and number of records processed.

========================================================================

Entering User-Defined Fields

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/User-Defined-Fields.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/User-Defined-Fields.htm

Entering User-Defined Fields

You can create global and client user-defined fields using the Global User Defined Fields and Client User Defined Fields forms. (Any user-defined fields configured at the system level are accessible from the Actions menu of the local form where they were created.)

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

Configuring User-Defined Fields - Global Level

To access this form and create global user-defined fields:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] .

  2. From System|Change, select Global User Defined Fields.The Global User Defined Fields form displays.

  3. Select a form name from the Page Titlewhere you want to set up fields. For example, selecting Employee Dependents (DEPENDENTS) displays the following fields:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click + to create new fields, then complete the following information for each field:
Field Description
Field Name Name of the field to be added. Fields can not contain any spaces.
Field Description Description of this field.
Field Type Type of field to be added. Options include Alphanumeric, Date, and Numeric.
Mandatory
  1. Click Save.

Configuring User-Defined Fields - Client Level

Use the Client User Defined Fields form to set user-defined fields on a client level.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form and set user-defined fields for a client:

  1. Click Client.

  2. From Client|Action, select Client User Defined Fields. The Client User Defined Fields form displays.

  3. Select a form name from the Page Title where you want to set up fields. For example, selecting Employee Details (EMPLOYEE.MASTER) displays the following fields:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click + to create new fields, then complete the following information for each field:
Field Description
Field Name Name of the field to be added. Fields can not contain any spaces.
Field Description Description of this field.
Field Type Type of field to be added. Options include Alphanumeric, Date, and Numeric.
Mandatory
  1. Click Save. Any fields created only display on the selected Page Title for the client where they were set up.

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Importing User-Defined Fields

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/User_Defined_Fields_Import.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/User_Defined_Fields_Import.htm

Importing User-Defined Fields

You can use the User Defined Fields Import form to import global and client user-defined fields that are related to specific forms/files. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Client Access Group and Data Entity security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click User Defined Fields Import.

Note: This form is available for service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors who have user-role access to the User Defined Fields Import form. Also, if your user role does not have access to the form/file listed in the import file, the import fails.

To import global and user-defined fields:

  1. Expand the Generate Import Spreadsheet panel. In the Select One Form field, select a form whose fields you want to import. (The form you select determines the column names that display in the spreadsheet.)

Note: You cannot select any forms where you do not have user-role access.

  1. Enter or select the Client ID or the Employer ID. (The field that displays depends on which form you select.)

  2. Select Download Spreadsheet. The system creates a spreadsheet that displays in a separate window, which is suitable for editing.

  3. Update the downloaded spreadsheet.

  4. In the Import Data section, enter an Import Name. (This is a required field; you cannot import a file without this information.)

  5. Select Upload File. Click Add Files and select the file to upload, then click Start Upload. (This file must be in .csv format and can only contain one form.)

Important! You must upload the most-recent version of the import file before performing an import so the field column headers match the field’s current type and required status. (If a field is duplicated, the system uploads the last value.)

Note: The system only imports rows for the first form listed in the file. (Subsequent rows that contain a different form name are ignored.)

  1. Click Close. A separate Downloads window displays the name of the .csv file that the system created. (Click Open file to view the downloaded file.)

  2. Click Import. Processing steps describe the information saved and include a date and time stamp. You can view this as a report or download in PDF or XLS format by clicking Report.

Note: Note the following that occurs during the import process:

  1. Click Close.

  2. Click Transaction Report to display a link to a downloadable report that contains the updated user-defined fields transactions. (This report indicates in the STATUS column if the fields were populated successfully.)

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Entering Information for Custom Fields

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/User_Fields.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/User_Fields.htm

Entering Information for Custom Fields

If there are custom fields defined by your organization, you can enter information in the User-Defined Fields form.

  1. Enter the Field Values as needed.

If there is a red indicator in the Mandatory column, you cannot save the record without entering that value.

  1. Click Accept when you have entered the values.

  2. Click Save. If you do not click Save, your changes are not saved in the User-Defined Fields form.

========================================================================

Adjusting W/C Billing Modifiers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/WC_Billing_Modifiers.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/WC_Billing_Modifiers.htm

Adjusting W/C Billing Modifiers

You can adjust worker’s compensation rates to bill the client with the W/C Billing Modifiers form. The amount billed is based on a percentage of the gross rate. The system keeps a history of discount and modifier data that you can view by selecting the date.

Importing a Workers’ Compensation Template File

Clicking the Import button

[Image: import icon]

displays the Data Import Tool form, which allows you to import a W/C Billing Modifiers template file that contains the following fields (this file must be in .txt format):

Note: Note: The Import button displays on the W/C Billing Modifiers form for all user roles except the “Deny” and “Inquiry-only” roles. Imports can be performed for multiple clients at the operations level. For more information about the Data Import Tool form, refer to the Payroll Administration Guide.

To adjust rates, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select W/C Billing Modifiers. [Image: W/C Billing Modifiers form]

  3. Fill in the required information in these fields.

Field Description
State Code Enter a two-character state code, or select it from the drop-down.
Location Code If the rate applies to a specific location for this client, enter the Location Code or select an existing location billing modifier record.
Effective Date Enter a new Effective Date or select an existing effective date.
Use Override Rates Select Use Override Rates to calculate the billing amount using the override rates. Otherwise, the system uses the Discount/Debit and Modifier values.
Pay Levels For each of the client’s Pay Levels established in the billing rules for the client, enter the rates for the selected state: - Enter the employer’s Discount/Debit rate. - Enter the employer’s Modifier rate.
  1. Click Save.

Using Override Rates Option

You can charge the client a different rate per workers’ compensation classification if you select Use Override Rates.

To enter billing rates in the Overrides panel, do the following (make sure you define a billing rate for each of the classifications used by the client):

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select W/C Billing Modifiers and select the Use Override Rates checkbox. [Image: W/C billing modifiers override settings]

  3. Enter the required information in these fields for each W/C classification code used by the client:

Field — Description

W/C Class Code — Enter or select each W/C classification code. If you select the W/C Class Code field, you can search for a class code using the WC Class Code or Description field in the Select WC Class Codes list. Note: After you enter or select the codes and save them, the system alphabetizes the list.

Billing Rate — Enter the Billing Rate. This is the rate per hundred dollars in wages or per hour worked (depending on the state) used to calculate the bill amount to the client for this W/C classification.

Bill on Wages or Hours — Select whether to Bill on Wages or Hours. The standard is wages unless the state specifies that the rate is based on hours.

Accrual Rate — Enter the Accrual Rate. This is the rate per hundred dollars in wages or per hour worked (depending on the state) used to calculate the accrual amount to the client for this W/C classification.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Work Groups

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Work_Groups.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Work_Groups.htm

Defining Work Groups

Set up work groups for employees with the Work Groups form. You can group employees, restrict user access, and so forth.

To define work groups:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Work Groups.

  3. Enter a work group name and description.

  4. Click Save.

Obsoleting a Work Group

To make an existing work group obsolete:

  1. Select Obsolete.

  2. Click Save. The obsolete work group displays Yes in the Obsolete Code column on the Work Group with User Security list, which you can access by selecting Work Group.

Note: After a work group is made obsolete, the following occurs:

Reviewing Employees Assigned to Selected Work Group

You can review all employees assigned to the selected work group for the client by selecting Employees Assigned To on the Actions menu. The Employees Assigned to Work Group form displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Only the employees you have access to display.

========================================================================

Maintaining Worksite Locations

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Change/Worksite_Locations.htm Path: PD/Company/Change/Worksite_Locations.htm

Maintaining Worksite Locations

You can maintain the details for the client’s worksite locations in the Worksite Locations form.

Working with SUTA

SUTA is based on the employee’s home location. Entering hours for a different state does not trigger the SUTA for that state. SUTA is based on the location code in the Employee Details form.

You cannot have multiple SUTA states in a single payroll. If you have an employee who worked in multiple states for a single payroll and wants to calculate SUTA for each state, you must run a separate payroll to process the hours for each state where the employee works. You must change the employee’s home location in Employee Details for each payroll you run before processing.

Importing a Worksite Locations Template File

Clicking the Import button

[Image: screenshot]

displays the Data Import Tool form, which allows you to import a Worksite Locations template file that contains the following fields (this file must be in .txt format):

The Import button displays on the Worksite Locations form for all service provider user roles except the “Deny” and “Inquiry-only” roles. Imports can be performed for multiple clients at the operations level.

Note: Note: For more information about the Data Import Tool form, refer to the Payroll Administration Guide.

Maintaining Worksite Location Information

Use the Worksite Locations panel to maintain the worksite location code and address information.

To maintain the worksite location code and address information:

  1. In the Worksite Locations panel, complete the following fields:
Field Description
Location Code Enter or select the Location Code. To search for an existing code, select Location Code. A selector form displays the location code, its name, state, city, G/L segment code, obsolete status, and obsolete date. (Note: By default, any location codes with the Obsolete Location field selected do not display in the list.) You can search for a specific location code, name, state, or city, or select a code from the list that displays. To filter the search further by displaying only obsolete codes, select Yes in the Obsolete field (the default is No). To refresh the list, select Reset Search and Filters. After entering the Location Code in the Worksite Locations panel, you can view a list of employees assigned to that location by selecting Employees Assigned To from the Actions menu. This list displays employees located at that site and their employment status: Active, Terminated, or on Leave of Absence. (Terminated employees display in red.)
Location Name Enter the Location Name.
Worksite Address Enter the worksite Addressand ZIP Code, including the ZIP+4 extension. The system automatically displays the GeoCode, City, County, and State information. You will be presented with a pop-up of Geocode options when an entered zip code spans multiple cities, counties, or localities. Select the correct Geocode to update the address. Note: Select the tool tip icon [Image: screenshot] in the GeoCode field to display the tool tip text. If you enter or select a geocode for a zip code that only has one geocode, a message displays, “The current geocode is the only one available for this zipcode.” Click OK to return to the form. After you enter or select the ZIP Code, the system checks the street address to make sure that it is valid. If there are typos, missing information, or other unrecognized values, the system displays a dialog suggesting a correction to the address. Click Yes to accept the corrected address, otherwise click No to save as-is or make other edits. Note: If you enter something that the system cannot match to any existing address, it displays the first address in the master list for the ZIP code (such as 1 Apple Drive).
Latitude/Longitude Optionally, enter values for the Latitude and Longitude of the worksite.
Portland Metro District Select this option if the worksite falls within the Portland Metro district. This field is used to calculate the Portland Metro SHS tax on high-earning employees and employees who opt into a flat amount of tax per pay period. See Establishing Employee Tax Information for details about this feature.
Remote Location When enabled (this field is disabled by default), the worksite geocode is ignored and taxes are based on the employee’s resident geocode. Workers Compensation also follows the resident geocode when enabled on the Benefit tab in the Client Details form. (The employee override is not required.) Note: The Remote Location setting on the worksite location treats the employee for taxation as if they have the tax calculation override set on the Employee Details form.
Work Comp State Select the Work Comp State under which workers’ compensation insurance covers the location.
Obsolete Location Select Obsolete Location if this location is no longer used and no employees are assigned to it. Selecting this option also hides the location from most search screens, such as the lookup field in New Hire.
Obsolete Date Enter the Obsolete Date when this location became obsolete. (This field is only for informational purposes.)
Contact Information Indicate contact information for this location: - Enter each contact’s Telephone number. - Enter the Contact Title. - Enter the contact’s Email Address. - Enter the Contact Fax. - Enter the Contact Name.
  1. Click Save.

Working with Miscellaneous GL Segments

Use the Misc GL panel to review Misc GL Counts (predefined wildcards) for this worksite location and enter replacement Misc GL Segments.

Note: During payroll processing, the system substitutes the GL segments for wildcards in GL account codes. These wildcards must also be included in the following setups:

When working with miscellaneous GL segments:

  1. The predefined wildcards display in rows in the Misc GL Count column, where the codes are always EEMLC01 through EEMLC99. (The program that evaluates the wildcards only looks for those values.)

  2. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Description. For example, EEMLC01 = Segment 1 and EEMLC02 = Segment 2. (You can apply these misc segments to account codes for other areas besides pay, such as taxes or deductions.)

Important! Any changes made to the descriptions affect all worksite locations in the active client.

Note: The Misc GL Description column’s values are for reference only. (These descriptions are stored in the client’s record.) The system automatically loads these values each time a worksite location record displays.

  1. If appropriate, enter the Misc GL Segment value that replaces the Misc GL Count wildcard.

  2. Click Save.

Establishing Benefit Plans

If the client offers location-specific plans, use the Eligible Benefits panel to establish the benefit plans for this location.

Note: The Eligible Benefits panel allows you to select one or more Benefit Plan IDs only if you have selected Locations Restrict Eligibility option in the Eligible Benefits Determinant field in the Benefits tab on the Client Details form. If you do not select this option, then you will not be able to select any Benefit Plan IDs. A conditional message, “Access to this section requires the Eligible Benefits Determinant to be set to Locations Restrict Eligibility on the Client Details form” also displays in the Eligible Benefits panel.

To establish benefit plans for this location, do the following:

  1. In the Eligible Benefits panel, complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Benefit Plan ID — Each Benefit Plan ID for the benefits that employees in the worksite location are eligible. Enter the Benefit Plan ID or select Benefit Plan ID to display the Select Benefit Plans list.

Plan Description — A description of the Benefit Plan ID.

Import Eligible Benefits — A quick link to import eligible benefit plans. Select this quick link to display the Eligible Benefits import template in the Data Import Tool.

  1. Click Save.

Note: If the Eligible Benefits panel is disabled and there is any existing data in this panel, then on saving the form, a message, “Do you wish to clear the existing Benefit Plan IDs in the Eligible Benefits section? Y/N” displays.

Entering SUTA Reporting States

Use the Location Based SUI panel to enter client SUTA reporting states for this location. This panel displays only if your organization has set up the custom feature code ALLOW-LOCN-BASED-SUI in System Parameters.

You might use the panel if the client has multiple entities, wants to process one payroll, and has different entity locations in the same state with account numbers because they are in client reporting states such as Nevada or Missouri.

To enter client SUTA reporting states for this location, do the following:

  1. Enter or select each client-reporting State Code.

  2. Enter or select the Starting Date.

  3. Enter or select the Ending Date.

  4. Enter or select the State ID Number for this client location.

Establishing Banking Information

Use the ACH/Account Setup panel to establish banking specific to this location. These values override those defined in Client Details.

Note: Note the following:

To establish banking specific to this location, do the following:

  1. Complete the following fields in these panels:
Field Name Description
Payroll Check Account Enter or select the account from which to draw payroll checks.
Direct Deposit Account Enter or select the account from which to draw direct deposit transactions.
Reverse Wire Account Enter or select the account from which to draw reverse wire checks. Note: The client must be set up with the Break Field set to Location and Create REAL Invoice Break enabled on the Billing tab in the Client Details form to invoice correctly by location.
Garnishment Check Account Enter or select the account from which to draw garnishment checks.
Child Support EFT Account Enter or select the Child Support EFT Account from which to draw garnishment EFT payments.
Location’s ACH Status Select the Location’s ACH Status. > Note: Note the following: - The ABA/ Routing Number must contain 9 digits total, 8 digits plus the checksum that is designated by the Federal Reserve Bank. - If you have multiple locations with separate bank accounts for each of them, you can debit an invoice for a specific location’s bank account by setting it to ACH by Location and selecting the Non-ACH option as the Location’s ACH Status, which would eliminate internal bank transfers when submitting a pending client bill.
  1. Click Save.

Maintaining Other Information

Use the Other Parameters panel to maintain other information about this location.

To maintain other information about this location, do the following:

  1. In the Other Parameters panel, complete the following fields:
Field Description
G/L Segment Code Enter any segment codes used to build general ledger account numbers: - In G/L Segment Code 1, enter the code to use as an alternative to the Location Code. - In G/L Segment Code 2, enter the G/L code that should substitute for EELOC2 in G/L code routines. - In G/L Segment Code 3, enter a third G/L code, if needed.
  1. Click Save to save the changes.

  2. Click Delete to delete a Location Code in PrismHR.

  3. Click Cancel to clear the form at any time.

Defining Special Tax Rates

Use the Special City Taxes for this Location panel to define special tax rates for this location.

To define special tax rates for this location, do the following:

  1. Enter or select each City Tax Authority for this location. The City Name displays.

  2. Enter the local Tax Rate to apply to gross earnings.

  3. Click Save.

  4. Click Delete to delete a Location Code in PrismHR.

  5. Click Cancel to clear the form at any time.

Eugene Oregon Public Safety Tax Setup

If this location is in Eugene, Oregon, you can use the three fields next to the tax rates panel to configure the 2021 Eugene Community Safety Payroll Tax (CSPT).

To set up Eugene CSPT for this worksite location:

  1. If the location is within the Eugene city limits, select Eugene CSPT.

  2. If this is a temporary worksite location, select Temporary Job Site. The system will default to the employee’s primary worksite location when calculating taxes. For example, if the employee usually works in Eugene and then works one day in a nearby town, and this option is selected, the system will compute that day’s taxes as if the employee was working in Eugene.

  3. Enter an Employer Tax Override rate, if necessary. This field functions like a tax adjustment on the employer component of the tax. (If you want to perform a tax adjustment on the employee component, you can do so on the Tax Adjustments form).

Maintaining Building Information

Use the Building Details panel to maintain information about the building used at this location.

To maintain information about the building used at this location, do the following:

  1. Enter the total number of Floors in Building.

  2. Enter the Highest Floor Occupied by the client in this building.

  3. Enter the building Construction Type, if required.

  4. Enter the Year this building was built, if required.

  5. Select Sprinklers if the building is equipped with a sprinkler system.

  6. Enter the Maximum Capacity of employees who are likely to be on site at the same time.

  7. Click Save.

  8. Click Delete to delete a Location Code in PrismHR.

  9. Click Cancel to clear the form at any time.

Establishing Minimum Wage Information

Use the Minimum Wage panel to establish specific information about the minimum wages used at this location.

To establish specific information about the minimum wages used at this location, do the following:

  1. For each rate effective date:
a. Enter or select the effective Minimum Wage Rate Date.
b. Enter the Minimum Wage for this location, which is the hourly wage.
— —
c. Enter the Minimum Cash Wage for this location.
— —
  1. — Enter the Minimum Wage Minor, which is the minimum hourly wage for minors if it is different than for adults.

  2. — Enter the Minimum Cash Wage Minor, which is the minimum cash wage for minors if it is different than for adults.

  1. Enter the age that this location classifies individuals as adults. Anyone under that age is considered a minor.

  2. Click Save.

  3. Click Delete to delete a Location Code in PrismHR.

  4. Click Cancel to clear the form at any time.

Indicating Associated Taxpayer Entities/Employers

Use the Eligible Employers panel if the client has alternate employers listed in the Client Details Other tab and you need to indicate which taxpayer entities/ employers are associated with the worksite location. This ensures that during the new hire process, employees can only be hired into locations for the specified employer and the worksite manager and trusted advisor users can select the appropriate employer.

If you do not specify any employers, then service providers can select any of the client’s alternate employers in the New Hire form. In addition, worksite managers can only select the default employer unless an Alternate Employer is listed on the worksite location.

Note: To change this behavior, enable the ALLOWWMNEWHIREALTEMP custom feature code, which allows a worksite manager/worksite trusted advisor to select an alternate employer on the New Hire form when the alternate employer’s Suppress Client Access is not set to Yes on the Client Details Other tab.

Accessing Other Options

You can access other information and settings using the Actions menu:

========================================================================

Defining Client Billing Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Billing.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Billing.htm

Defining Client Billing Information

Define the client’s billing information. (This information does not apply to Corporate service types.)

========================================================================

Introduction

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Intro.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Intro.htm

Introduction

The client administration online help explains the tasks and features used to create and maintain your clients.

========================================================================

Setting Up a New Client

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_NewClient.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_NewClient.htm

Setting Up a New Client

Perform the following procedures to successfully set up your client:

========================================================================

Setting Other Client Features

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Other_Info.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Other_Info.htm

Setting Other Client Features

Other features allow you to view, maintain, or process client information.

========================================================================

Establishing Other Client Setup Features

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Other_Setup.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Other_Setup.htm

Establishing Other Client Setup Features

Set up other features as required for your organization.

Note: Note: See the Benefits Administration Guide to set benefits for the client.

========================================================================

Setting Up Time Off Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_PTO_Plans.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_PTO_Plans.htm

Setting Up Time Off Plans

Absence plans are unique to each client and can differ from the simple to the extremely complex. Once you set up the absence accrual files in PrismHR, the system automatically accrues paid time off benefits for each employee according to the parameters you establish.

Although it is important to understand how to establish these files, the real key to setting up the files correctly is understanding exactly how the client’s absence benefit plan works.

Use these instructions to learn how to:

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Using Reports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Reports.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Chapter_Reports.htm

Using Reports

Use these reports in PrismHR to view client-related information.

========================================================================

Accessing Features in the Actions Menu

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Client_Details_Action_Menu.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/CA_UG_Client_Details_Action_Menu.htm

Accessing Features in the Actions Menu

Some features on the of the Client Details form are also available in other parts of the system. The following sections describe features available on the Actions menu.

========================================================================

Creating a Client Record

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Front_Matter/New_Client_Next_Steps.htm Path: PD/Company/Front_Matter/New_Client_Next_Steps.htm

Creating a Client Record

Complete these additional steps to create a new basic client setup. You might also need to establish other client settings. These are only the most essential settings.

To view client details:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.

  3. Select from these options:

========================================================================

Establishing Payroll Processing Options for the Client

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reference/Access_To_Time_Sheet_Entry.htm Path: PD/Company/Reference/Access_To_Time_Sheet_Entry.htm

Establishing Payroll Processing Options for the Client

You can establish the client’s payroll processing options using the information in this section.

Worksite Time Sheet Entry is in the Client Details Control tab. Self-Service Payroll and Self-Service Restrictions are in the Client Details Payroll tab.

Description Worksite Time Sheet Entry Self-Service Payroll Self-Service Restrictions
No time sheet entry Not selected Not selected (not applicable)
Time sheet entry only Selected Not selected (not applicable)
Time sheet entry and calculation Not selected Selected Finalize & Print
Time sheet entry, calculation, and finalization Not selected Selected Print
Time sheet entry, calculation, finalization, and printing (full self-service payroll) Not selected Selected –Select–

Related Topics

Using Client Payroll Processing Options

Client Details Setting Client Control Parameters

Client Details Controlling Client Payroll Processing

========================================================================

Using Client Payroll Processing Options

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reference/Client_Payroll_Processing_Options.htm Path: PD/Company/Reference/Client_Payroll_Processing_Options.htm

Using Client Payroll Processing Options

========================================================================

Setting Up Payroll Approval

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reference/Payroll_Approval.htm Path: PD/Company/Reference/Payroll_Approval.htm

Setting Up Payroll Approval

Your organization can set up the system so that the client can see the invoice and approve the payroll before it is complete. You can set approvals for both the initialization and finalization steps of the process.

Setting Up a Client for Payroll Calculation Approvals

You do not need to define an approval policy to set the client to approve their payrolls.

To set up a client for payroll calculation approvals, do the following:

  1. Go to the Client Details form (found in the Client menu under Client|Change).

  2. Select the Control tab.

  3. Select the Worksite Payroll Approval option to send an approval email after a payroll is calculated (initialized).

  4. If appropriate, you can also specify that a Payroll Finalization Notification should be sent by email and, if so, who should receive those emails other than the payroll approver. This sends an email after the payroll is posted (finalized).

Note: Note: This is simply a notice that the payroll was posted. It is not related to any approval policies for payroll finalization that your organization has defined at either the system level or for the client.

  1. Click Save.

[Image: screenshot]

Setting Up an Approval Policy for Payroll Posting

To set up an approval policy for payroll posting, do the following:

  1. You can set up approval policies for all clients or for the specific client.
  1. If you are setting up a system-level policy, specify the Service Type. If you are setting up a client-level policy, continue to the next step.

  2. From the Approval Type drop-down, select Payroll Finalization.

  3. Define each of the users who need to approve the payroll when it is posted. (For example, you might specify the HR Role of Payroll Approver.)

  4. Click Save.

Setting Up a User as a Payroll Approver

To make a user the client’s payroll approver, do the following:

  1. Go to the Users form. (Click Back Office. Select System|Change.)

  2. Enter the User ID of the user who will approve payrolls.

If you are creating a new user account, enter the other information as needed. See Creating a New User for detailed instructions.

  1. In Human Resources Roles, select Payroll Approver.

You should also make sure that the Active User option is selected, that the user has access to the client, and that the user role assigned to the user has full access to the approval forms.

  1. Click Save.

[Image: screenshot]

After you complete this setup, when a payroll processor calculates and reviews the next payroll, the user will receive an email with the invoice details and a link to payroll approval in PrismHR.

Defining Custom Message Templates for Approvals

You can set up message templates to send for each kind of payroll approval for your organization to use instead of the system default. This allows you to customize the message.

To create a message template, do the following:

  1. Go to the Message Templates form. (Click Back Office. Select System|Change.)

  2. Enter a unique Message ID for the template, for example, PAYCALCAPP.

  3. Enter a Description of the template, for example, Payroll Calculation Approval.

  4. Select the Content Type: TEXT or HTML.

  5. Enter the Subject line for emails that use this template.

  6. Enter the Body of the message. You can incorporate HTML in the body of the message if you select the HTML format.

  7. Click Save.

To use the template for approvals or finalization notices, do the following:

  1. Go to the System Parameters form. (Click Back Office. Select System|Change.)

  2. Open the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] and then select Email Services.

  3. Click + to add a new row.

  4. Select the appropriate email Template Type:

  1. Click Save in Email Services.

  2. Click Save in System Parameters.

Related Topics

Client Details Setting Client Control Parameters

Editing a Worksite Manager User

Processing Approvals

Maintaining Message Templates

Setting Up Automated Email Messages

Setting Global Approval Policies

Setting Approval Policies

========================================================================

Absence Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Absence_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Absence_Codes_Report.htm

Absence Codes Report

The Absence Code Report displays all types of absences that are entered into PrismHR.

The Absence Codes Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Absence Codes report:

Figure 18: Absence Codes Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Auto Holiday Pay Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Auto_Holiday_Pay_Rules_and_Days_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Auto_Holiday_Pay_Rules_and_Days_Report.htm

Auto Holiday Pay Report

In association with the Auto Holiday Pay feature, you can run the Auto Holiday Pay Report to display the auto holiday pay rules (Rules option) or the days in a date range (Days option) for one or more clients. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This form is only available for service providers.

To run this report:

  1. Go to the Reports menu and select Auto Holiday Pay Report on the Operations Payroll|Report menu.

  2. Enter or select the Client ID. The Client Name displays.

  3. Select either the Rules (default) or Days report type. If you select Days, enter or select the Start Date and End Date.

  4. Click Run. The report displays.

The report columns for the Auto Holiday Pay Rules Report are:

For example:

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns for the Auto Holiday Days Report are:

For example:

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Course Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Course_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Course_Codes_Report.htm

Course Codes Report

The Course Code Report displays all types of courses that are entered into PrismHR.

The Course Codes Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Course Codes report:

Figure 20: Course Codes Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Department Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Department_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Department_Codes_Report.htm

Department Codes Report

The Department Code Report displays all types of departments that are entered into PrismHR.

The Department Codes Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Department Codes report:

Figure 22: Department Codes Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Division Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Division_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Division_Codes_Report.htm

Division Codes Report

The Division Code Report displays all divisions that are entered into PrismHR.

The Division Codes Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Division Codes report:

Figure 24: Division Codes Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Location Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Location_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Location_Codes_Report.htm

Location Codes Report

The Location Codes Report displays all entered locations.

This report is located in theReports menu on the Client|Report menu.

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Material Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Material_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Material_Codes_Report.htm

Material Codes Report

The Material Code Report displays all types of hazardous materials that are entered into PrismHR.

The Material Codes Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Material Codes report:

Figure 26: Material Codes Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Mileage Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Mileage_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Mileage_Codes_Report.htm

Mileage Codes Report

The Mileage Code Report displays all mileage codes that are entered into PrismHR.

The Mileage Codes Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Mileage Codes report:

Figure 28: Mileage Codes Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Pay Grades Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Pay_Grades_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Pay_Grades_Report.htm

Pay Grades Report

The Pay Grades Report displays the pay ranges for a specified pay grade that are entered into PrismHR.

The Pay Grades Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Pay Grades report:

Figure 30: Pay Grades Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Union Codes Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/Reports/Union_Codes_Report.htm Path: PD/Company/Reports/Union_Codes_Report.htm

Union Codes Report

The Union Code Report displays all unions that are entered into PrismHR.

The Union Codes Report is found in theReports menu under Client|Report.

Show me an example of the Union Codes report:

Figure 32: Union Codes Report

[Image: screenshot]

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Managing Pending Payday Notifications

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/2020/Payday_Notification_Queue.htm Path: PD/Company/View/2020/Payday_Notification_Queue.htm

Managing Pending Payday Notifications

You can manage pending payday notifications using the Payday Notification Queue form, which is available on the Client|View menu. For example:

[Image: Payday notification queue]

Note: Note the following:

To manage pending payday notifications, do the following:

  1. Go to the Payday Notification Queue form and complete the following fields:
Field Description
Pay Date Date the payroll is scheduled to process, which must be a future pay date within 30 days of the current date. (The date always defaults to seven days in the future after the form loads.) Note: The system uses the Pay Date on the voucher to trigger the payday notification.
Employee To view and manage a specific employee, do one of the following: - Enter the employee ID or name in the Employee field. - Search for an employee by ID or name by selecting the Employee field. The Select Employee search dialog displays where you can enter the employee ID or name, which displays in the results list. You can click Reset Search and Filters to remove the search entry from the Employee ID or Name field. Selecting the desired employee from the results list displays it back in the Payday Notification Queue form. Note: This field is optional.
  1. The form loads all enabled payday notifications for the active client, if the employee has not opted out of their settings on EP.

In addition, note the following:

  1. Select the checkbox for each pending payday notification you want to remove or click Select All to remove all displayed notifications.

  2. Click Remove from queue.

In addition, you can obtain a list of payment notification transmission statuses by running the Payday Notification Transmission Report. (See Generating Payday Notification Transmissions.)

Note: This report is only available for service providers.

========================================================================

Billing Register

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Billing_Register.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Billing_Register.htm

Billing Register

The Billing Register (Figure 15) displays client billing information for a specified bill code and year, quarter or month.

Show me an example of the Billing Register form:

Figure 15: Billing Register

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the Bill Code to display.

  2. Select the Year. The billing register information displays.

  3. If you want, select the Quarter to narrow the list.

  4. If you want, select the Month to further narrow the list.

  5. You can click Chart to open the Client Billing Register Chart.

  6. Click Cancel.

Client Billing Register Chart

This chart displays the billing for the previous twelve months leading up to the period selected in the main form. You can view the information by Hours Worked or Hours Paid.

Show me an example of the Client Billing Register Chart:

Figure 16: Client Billing Register Chart

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the Display Type.

  2. Click Close when you are finished.

========================================================================

Understanding Client Analytics

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Client_Analytics.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Client_Analytics.htm

Understanding Client Analytics

View relevant details about employees through a series of graphs with the Client Analytics form.

To access this form:

  1. Select Client.
  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details.
  3. Select Analytics from the Actions menu.

Related Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Client Reports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Client_Reports.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Client_Reports.htm

Client Reports

The Client Reports form (Figure 9) gives you access to reports run in the backend system.

Show me an example of the Client Reports form:

Figure 9: Client Reports

[Image: screenshot]

Show me an example of the Print Service Information:

Figure 10: Print Service Information

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Client Search

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Client_Search.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Client_Search.htm

Searching for a Client

To select a client, use the Search All Companies dialog.

To access this dialog, click the currently selected client. This displays between the system’s top menu and the current form:

[Image: Indicates the client ID and name as it displays in PrismHR, above the form and below the top menu.]

To refine the search:

  1. Enter Company ID, Company Name (which is the “doing business as” or DBA name), Legal Name, or Telephone number.

  2. Click Refine.

  3. To select the client, do one of the following:

========================================================================

Client Status History

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Client_Status_History.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Client_Status_History.htm

Client Status History

The Client Status History form (Figure 12) displays the current and past statuses for the client.

Show me an example of the Client Status History form:

Figure 12: Client Status History

[Image: screenshot]

PrismHR status codes are:

Related Topic

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

Viewing Employee SUTA or SDI Tax Deduction

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Client_Tax_Register.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Client_Tax_Register.htm

Viewing Employee SUTA or SDI Tax Deductions

The Client Tax Register form displays an employee’s SUTA or SDI tax deductions for a specific tax year or quarter.

[Image: Client tax register]

To access the client tax register:

  1. Enter the Employee ID for this client tax inquiry.

  2. Select the Tax Deduction Code.

  3. Select the Year for which taxes were paid.

  4. Select the Quarter in which taxes were paid. The form displays the client tax information in the inquiry form.

  5. Click Cancel when you are finished.

========================================================================

Reviewing Invoice Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Invoices.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Invoices.htm

Reviewing Invoice Information

The Invoices form displays invoice information for a selected year.

Reviewing an Invoice

You can display and print a selected Billing Voucher or Invoice by clicking the appropriate icon in the Invoices panel.

Reviewing Invoice Accounting

The Invoice Accounting panel provides a list of the general ledger items generated and the accounts to be credited or debited by the selected invoice.

[Image: screenshot]

Reviewing Client Accounting Information

The Client Accounting panel displays information for the selected invoice if client-level accounting is set up instead of a standard G/L.

[Image: screenshot]

Reviewing Invoice Totals

When you click

[Image: screenshot]

in the Invoices panel, a graph displaying the invoice totals opens.

[Image: screenshot]

To review invoice totals:

  1. Select the Payroll Type.

  2. Choose how you want to view the information from the Options drop-down: By Month, By Year, or Year Over Year.

  3. Select the number of years to include from the Past Years drop-down.

  4. Click Refresh [Image: screenshot] to see the selected information.

  5. When you are finished, click Close.

========================================================================

Miscellaneous Billing Review

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Miscellaneous_Billing_Review.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Miscellaneous_Billing_Review.htm

Miscellaneous Billing Review

The Miscellaneous Billing Review form lists billing items for transactions entered through the Miscellaneous Invoice form.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select a Year to view.

  2. Click a Misc Bill Item. The Client Misc Bill Inquiry window opens, displaying the detailed information.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Cancel.

========================================================================

Working with Payroll Notes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Payroll_Notes_Listing.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Payroll_Notes_Listing.htm

Working with Payroll Notes

The Payroll Notes list displays any current payroll notes for the client. For example:

[Image: Payroll notes form]

Note: Note: Any notes with an Expires On date before the current date do not display in the list. Also, if a user acknowledges a payroll note, it does not appear in the list anymore. The system deletes notes after a certain number of days, as set in System|Change|System Parameters.

You can do the following with payroll notes:

To narrow an employee search, use the following methods:

Note: Note the following when using the filters:

Column — Description

Employee ID/Employee Name — Employee ID and Employee Name display the relevant information if the note is specific to one employee.

Note: Note Details — > Note: Note Details provides detailed information.

View Count — View Count indicates the number of times a payroll processor has acknowledged the note.

Display Mode — Display Mode indicates whether the note displays One Time (Y), for All Payrolls (N), or for Scheduled Payrolls (S). Note: The column displays the data’s description, not the code.

Urgent — Urgent indicates whether the report is urgent (Yes) or not urgent (No). Note: The column displays the data’s description, not the code.

Expires On — Expires On is the date after which the note will no longer display.

Date Entered/Time Entered — The date and time when the note was created display in Date Entered and Time Entered.

Entered By — Entered By is the user name who entered the note.

Note: Note: In addition to accessing this form directly from the Client|View menu, you can also access it from the Actions menu on the Client|Change|Client Details and HR|Change|Employee Details forms.

========================================================================

Viewing Quarterly Tax Summary

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Quarterly_Tax_Summary.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Quarterly_Tax_Summary.htm

Viewing Quarterly Tax Summary

The Quarterly Tax Summary provides a breakdown of the tax information required for the Employer’s Quarterly Federal Tax Return.

[Image: quarterly tax summary]

To view the quarterly tax summary:

  1. Access the form by opening the Client menu and selecting Quarterly Tax Summary under Client|View.

  2. Select the Year.

  3. Select the Quarter.

Note: Note: The data in the screen reflects the current selections. As you choose values, the data populates the form.

  1. When you finish reviewing the information, click Cancel.

========================================================================

Working with Completed Payroll Notes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Working_with_Completed_Payroll_Notes.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Working_with_Completed_Payroll_Notes.htm

Working with Completed Payroll Notes

You can use the Completed Payroll Notes form to review or track previously entered notes that are marked as completed using a date range that occurs within one year. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To search for completed notes by the date they were entered, simply enter or select the Start Date and End Date, then click Submit. (If you are searching for completed notes using a date range greater than one day, it must be within one year.) For example, the following completed payroll notes display for the date range 11/28/2022 through 11/27/2023:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: All payroll notes that are past their expiration date automatically move to the Completed Payroll Notes form and display “Expired” in the Completed By column instead of the user who completed the payroll note.

After the list displays, you can view the details of an existing completed note by clicking the Ref #. (This information displays in the read-only Finalized Payroll Notes form.)

Note: Note the following when working with the Start Date and End Date:

Reviewing the Note Information

The columns in the table summarize the note information:

Column — Description

Employee ID/Employee Name — Employee ID and Employee Name display the relevant information if the note is specific to one employee.

Note: Note Details — > Note: Note Details provides detailed information. (Only the first 30 characters of the note display.)

Date Entered/Time Entered — The date and time when the note was created display in Date Entered and Time Entered.

Entered By — Entered By is the user name who entered the note.

Completed By — Completed By is the user name who completed the note.

========================================================================

Working with Finalized Payroll Notes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Company/View/Working_with_Finalized_Payroll_Notes.htm Path: PD/Company/View/Working_with_Finalized_Payroll_Notes.htm

Working with Finalized Payroll Notes

You can use the Finalized Payroll Notes form to view the details of a payroll note that is marked as completed. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: To access the Finalized Payroll Notes form, select a Ref # that displays in the Completed Payroll Notes form. (See Working with Completed Payroll Notes.)

This read-only form details the information in the completed payroll note, including who viewed the note. (The last line in the Viewed By section displays the person who completed the note.)

Note: For more information about payroll note details, see Maintaining Payroll Notes.